Tải bản đầy đủ (.docx) (150 trang)

tienganh

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (906.51 KB, 150 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

<b> </b>
<b> </b>


<b> Phòng giáo dục- đào tạo anh sơn</b>
<b> Trờng trung học cơ sở thạch-thị</b>


<b>GIÁO ÁN tiÕng anh 8 </b>



:

<b>khoa häc x· héi</b>



Giáo viên:

<b>đặng thị lơng</b>



<i> Năm học 2010 -2011</i>


<b>Phân phối chơng trình tiếng anh 8</b>
Cả năm: 105 tiết


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

<i>Bài</i> <i>T/số</i>
<i>tiết</i>


<i>Tiết</i>


<i>PPCT</i> <i>Nội dung </i>


Ôn tËp, kiÓm tra 1 1.


Unit 1 :


My friends 5


2. Getting started+listen and read


3. Speak + Listen


4. Read
5. Write


6. Language Focus


Unit 2:


Making Arrangements 5


7. Getting started+listen and read
8. Speak + Listen


9. Read
10. Write


11. Language Focus


Unit 3:


At home 6


12. Getting started+listen and read
13. Speak


14. Listen
15. Read
16. Write



17. Language Focus
Ôn tËp cñng cè 1 18.


Test 1 19.


Correct the test 1 20.


Unit 4 :


Our past 5


21. Getting started+listen and read
22. Speak + Listen


23. Read
24. Write


25.


Language Focus


Unit 5 :


Study habits 5


26. Getting started+listen and read
27. Speak + Listen


28. Read
29. Write



30. Language Focus


Unit 6 :


The Young Pioneers Club 5


31. Getting started+listen and read
32. Speak + Listen


33. Read
34. Write


35. Language Focus
Ôn tập, củng cố 36.


Test 1 37.


Correct the test 1 38.


Unit 7 :


My neighborhood 5


39. Getting started+listen and read
40. Speak + Listen


41. Read
42. Write



43. Language Focus


Unit 8 :


Country life and City life 5


44. Getting started+listen and read
45. Speak + Listen


46. Read
47. Write


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

51.
52.
1ST<sub> Term Test</sub> <sub>1</sub> <sub>53.</sub>
Correct the test 1 54.


Unit 9 :


A first - Aid Course 5


55. Getting started+listen and read
56. Speak + Listen


57. Read
58. Write


59. Language Focus


Unit 10:



Recycling 5


60. Getting started+listen and read
61. Speak + Listen


62. Read
63. Write


64. Language Focus


Unit 11:


Traveling Around Vietnam 5


65. Getting started+listen and read
66. Speak + Listen


67. Read
68. Write


69. Language Focus
Ôn tập, củng cố 1 70.


Test 1 71.


Test correction 1 72.


Unit 12 :



A Vacation Abroad 5


73. Getting started+listen and read
74. Speak + Listen


75. Read
76. Write


77. Language Focus


Unit 13:


Festivals 5


78. Getting started+listen and read
79. Speak + Listen


80. Read
81. Write


82. Language Focus


Unit 14 :


Wonders of the world 5


83. Getting started+listen and read
84. Speak + Listen


85. Read


86. Write


87. Language Focus
Ôn tập, củng cố 1 88.


Test 1 89.


Test correction 1 90.


Unit 15 :


Computers 5


91. Getting started+listen and read
92. Speak + Listen


93. Read
94. Write


95. Language Focus


Unit 16:


Inventions 5


96. Getting started+listen and read
97. Speak + Listen


98. Read
99. Write



100. Language Focus
Revision 3


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

<b>Kiến thức ngôn ngữ Tiếng Anh Lớp 8</b>



<b> - Tenses: present simple, present progressive, past simple, past</b>


<b>progressive, future simple (including be going to), present perfect </b>



<b>- Modal verbs: must, have to, ought to, should, may, can, could </b>


<b>- Question words, indirect questions with if and whether </b>



<b>- Nouns: singular, plural, countable, uncountable </b>


<b>- Adverbs of places, time, frequency, manner </b>



<b>- Adjectives: attributive and predicative, comparatives and</b>


<b>superlatives </b>



<b>- Reflective pronouns </b>



<b>- Prepositions of time, place, direction </b>


<b>- Conjunctions of time </b>



<b>- Reported speech: commands, requests and advice </b>


<b>- Passive form </b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

<b>- Gerund and infinitive: like + gerund, like/preposition + infinitive,</b>


<i><b>adjective + enough + infinitive </b></i>



<b>- Requests with: Would / Do you mind if …? Would / Do you mind +</b>



<i><b>V-ing? </b></i>



<b>- Compound sentences with but, and, or </b>



<b> - Complex sentences: adverbial clauses of time, place and reason</b>



Date: Sunday, August16th-2010


Period 1: <i> </i>

<b>REVISION</b>

<i> </i>





<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to review some grammar
points they have learnt in English 7


<b>I . Knowledge </b>: Simple past , simple present , present progessive….


<b> II . Skills:</b> Writing and speaking


<b>B.PRECEDURE: </b>


<b>I Settlement: </b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II Checking:</b><i><b> </b></i>


<b> III New lesson:</b>


<b>Students activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
Exercise 1:



<i>* Supply the correct form or tenseof the verbs:</i>


1.They(study)……..in the library now.
2.Let’s(go)….to English club.


3.Everyday,my father(travel)….to work by bus.
4.Last year,We(be)…..in grade 7.


5.He(can/swim)…..across the river.
6.Ba(go)…to school by bike yesterday.
7.He enjoys(collect)….stamps and coins.
8.My brother(be)….a engineer.


9.Next year,my sister(be)….a teacher.
10.What about(visit)…..Ha Long Bay?


T. asks Ss to recall the forms of the tenses that
they have studied in the program of English 7.
T.runs through models the first. Ss stand up and
read alound the answers.


Ex: 1.<i> are studying</i>


T asks Ss to work ind in pairs in groups.
T. gives the feedback.


Ss listen to T.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups giving the suitable form of the


verbs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

<b>Students activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
* <i>Answer:</i>


2.go 6.went
3.travels 7.collecting
4.were 8.is


5.can swim 9.will be/is going to be
10.visiting


Exercise 2:


*<i>Make questions using the underlined words or </i>
<i>phrases</i>:


1.I’d like a cowboy movie.


………


2.My family usually watch T.V in the evening.


………


3.My mother is cooking in the kitchen.


………


4.Hai enjoyed reading books.



………


5.I have a lot of interesting books.


………


T. runs through models.
Example:


<i>1.What would you like to see?</i>


T asks Ss to work ind in pairs in groups.
T. gives the feedback


<i>* Answer:</i>


2.What does your family usually do(watch)in the
evening?


3.Where is your mother cooking?
4.Who enjoyed reading book?
5.How many books do you have?


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups making questions using the
underlined words or phrases.


Ss stand up and read alound the
answers.



<b>IV. Consolidation:</b> <i>( involved )</i>


<b>V. Homework:</b>


- Revise all studied knowledge in the program of English 7.


- Prepare Unit 1 : My Friends <i>( Getting Started , Listen and Read ( P. 10 -11 )</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


<b>---Unit 1: MY FRIENDS</b>



<b>Tổng số 5 tiết</b>


1. Mục tiêu<b>: Học sinh có thể</b>


<b>- Giới thiệu về mình và người khác.</b>


<b>- Mơ tả một số nột về hình dáng, tính cách của một người bạn.</b>
<b> - Viết thông tin về bản thân và về những người xung quanh.</b>


2. Ngôn ngữ:


<i><b>- Present simple to talk about general truths (Review)</b></i>
<i><b>- Simple past tense (Review)</b></i>


<i><b>- (Not)adj + enough + to infinitive</b></i>


3. Từ vựng:<b> Theo chủ điểm: Friends</b>



<b>- Từ chỉ hình dáng, tính cách (dùng để tả người) </b><i><b>generous, reserved, slim/ slender,</b></i>
<i><b>sociable…</b></i>


<b>- Các cụm từ dùng để chào hỏi, giới thiệu…</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

4. Các kĩ năng cần đạt


<b>- Thực hành hỏi-đáp để có thơng tin chi tiết mụ tả một người.</b>
<b>- Đọc hiểu về miêu tả tính cách của một người bạn.</b>


<b>- Nghe các trao đổi ngắn về giới thiệu để làm quen và điền thông tin thiếu.</b>
<b>- Viết thông tin cá nhân và của các bạn trong lớp.</b>


<b>*Lưu ý: </b>


<b>+ Với học sinh yếu: </b>


<b>- Cần tập đọc để phát âm đúng và nắm được các từ dùng để tả tính cách và hình</b>
<b>dáng của một người.</b>


<b>- Bài viết: Tập trung trả lời hết các câu hỏi trong SGK – Dùng các câu đơn.</b>


<b>- Phần học sinh tự học:Tập đọc nhiều lần các bài đối thoại, bài đọc hiểu để thuộc từ,</b>
<b>thuộc cách phát âm các từ mới, từ khó.</b>


<b>+ Học sinh khá giỏi: Viết một đoạn văn trong khoảng 70-80 từ về một người bạn. </b>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>



---Date: Tuesday, August17th-2010


Period : 2

<i><b> </b></i>

<b> Unit 1: MY FRIENDS</b>



<i><b> </b></i>

<i>Lesson 1: Section Getting started P.10</i>


<i> Listen and Read P. </i>

<i>11</i>
<i><b>A.OBJECTIVES</b></i>: By the end of this lesson, ss will be able to describe their friends.


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>

<i> *(not) adjectives + enough + to infinitives</i>


<i> *What do/does…..look like?</i>


<b> II.Skills: </b>Speaking,Listening and Speaking


<i><b>B.PROCEDURE:</b></i>


<b>I.Settlement: </b>Greeting and check the attendance.


<b> II.Revision: * Getting started</b>


T. asks Ss to look at the pictures on page 10. T. models the first picture, then asks Ss to
work ind - in pairs - in groups describing the groups of friends and their favorite activities
T gives the feedback.


Answer:


a.They like/enjoy playing scoocer.
b. They like reading books.


c. They like playing chess.


d. They like playing volleyball.


<b> </b>III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b> 1. Presentation:</b>


<i> a. pre- teach vocab:</i>


. (to) seem (translation)
. next door (Adj)


. (to) look like (translation)
. enough (Adv)


T. elicits models T. asks Ss to repeat
chorally and then individually.


T. reports on the board,then checks the stress
and meaning.


<i>*Checking vocab</i>: R.O.R


<i><b>b.Pre- questions:</b></i> Give students some questions
and ask them to work in pairs to answer them.


<i>-</i> <i>Who is she in the picture?</i>
<i>-</i> <i>Where does Nien live?</i>
<i>-</i> <i>Is she a beautiful girl?</i>


<i>-</i> <i>Does Lan know Nien?</i>


<b> </b>


Ss answer-listen to T’ model and then
repeat chorally- ind.Ss answer about
the stree and the meaning as well.Ss
copy down into the notebook.


Ss answer the questions about the
content of the lesson in pront of the
class.


<i>*Answer:</i>


-She is Nien.
-She lives in hue.
…….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<i>-</i> <i>Was Nien Hoa classmate?</i>’
Activitiy 1<i>:</i> Practic the dialouge


T.elicits:“<i>Today we re going to listen to the </i>’


<i>diaouge b/w Hoa and Lan.In the dialouge, Hoa </i>
<i>is going to tell about her next-door </i>


<i>neighbor,Nien</i>”



T. asks Ss to listen to the dialouge, then work in
pairs with the dialouge.


T. calls some Ss to stand up and practice
the dialouge in front of the class.


Activitiy 1<i>:</i> Task 2 P.11 (text book)
T. runs through,then models the first.
Example<i>:</i>


a.Nien/She lives in Hue.


T asks Ss to read the dialouge,then ask and
answer the questions in pairs.


Answer<i>:</i>


b.No,she doesn’t.


c.”She wasn’t old enough to be in my class”.
d.Nien/She’s going to visit Hoa at Christmast.


<i> </i>Model Sentences<i>:</i>


a. S1: What does she look like?
S2: She’s beautiful.


b. She wasn’t old enough to be in my class.
T. elicits models repeat chorally ind


form cocept check.


Form: a. <b> S + be + Adj .</b><i>(For discription)</i>


<b> </b> b. S+be(not)<b>+</b>Adj<b>+enough+</b>toVinf


<i> (khơng đủ…để có thể….)</i>


<b>2. Practice: </b> Picture Drill


<i><b> Exercise 3 P. 6 </b></i>–<i> 7 (workbook)</i>


T. asks Ss to look at the pictures.T. models the
first picture.


<i>*Example Exchange:</i>


S1: What does Thu look like?
S2: She is slim.


T. asks Ss to work ind - in pairs - in groups
describing the people.T gives the feedback.
* <i>Answer</i>:


b.Mr Tuan is bald.
c.Nam is tall.
d.Lan is slim.


<b>3.Further Practice:</b> <i> Mapped Dialougue</i>



<i> HUNG MAI</i>


Hello/Mai Hi/Hung.You/
happy
I/met/old friend/Hai Do/know/him?
I/don’t/so.He/ What/he/like?
classmate/HN


He/tall/thin. Did/he/volleyball?
Oh,no./he/strong/ Oh.what/pity!


open- closed pairs with the dialouge
b/w Lan and Hoa.


Ss look at the book and listen to T.


Ss work in pairs reading the text and
answer the questions.


Ss look at the pictures and T’s model.Ss
descrbing the people and then stand up
reading alound the answers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
T. runs elicit models T. asks Ss to repeat


chorally, then ind T. asks Ss to work in open-
closed pairs.T give the feedback.


<i>* Example exchange:</i>



Hung: Hello, Mai.


Mai: Hi, Hung.You seem happy.
Hung: I met my old friends, Hai.
Mai: Do I know him?


Hung: I don’t think so. He was my clasmate in
HN.


Mai: What does he look like?
Hung: He is tall and thin.
Mai: did he play volleyball?


Hung: Oh,no. He wasn’t old enough to play it.
Mai: Oh.What a pity!


Ss work in open closed pairs.


<b>IV. Consolidation</b>:


- S + tobe (not) +adj+ enough + to + verb


- What do/does + S + look like?


<b> V. Homework: </b>


<b> </b>- Memorize vocab.


<b> </b>- Revise the use of “enough” and describe people.



<b> </b> -Write 2 sentences usingS + tobe (not) +adj+ enough + to + verb.
-Exercise 5 P.9 (workbook)


-Prepare Unit 1: My Friends- Section Speak and Listen P.11-12


<i> (Describe people with Tobe or Have/Has)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date : Wednesday, August18th-2010


Period<i>: </i> 3<i> </i>

<b>Unit 1: MY FRIENDS</b>



<i> Lesson 2: Speak and Listen P. 11- 12</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to will be able to describe
someone.


<b> I . Knowledges</b>: <i>-. To be/ to have.</i>


<b> II. Skills</b>: speaking and listening


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I. Settlement: </b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II. Warm-up:</b>Brainstorm


* T asks Ss to think of the adjectives to describe people and fill in the nets in 2 teams.




<i> tall slim long brown</i>


<i><b> Build Hair</b></i>


<i><b> fat short straight</b></i>


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>‘ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Pre- Speaking:</b>


<i>a. Vocabulary:</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>‘ <b>Students activities</b>’


T.elicits models T. asks Ss to repeat chorally
individually.


T. reports on the board,then checks the stress and
meaning.


<i>*Checking vocab</i>: R.O.R


<i><b>b. Presentation dialogue:</b></i>


T uses Speak 1 to set the scene and elicits the model
sentences.



<i> *Model sentences:</i>


. She is short and thin
. She has long blond hair.


<i>*Form: </i>S + be + Adj.


S <i>+ Have/Has</i> + O.


<b>2. While </b>–<b> Speaking</b>: Word cue drill:


<i> a. He/ tall/thin/long/black blond.</i>
<i> b. She/short/fat/straight/brown</i>
<i> c. She/short/slim/curly.</i>


<i> d. He/tall/fat/curly/black.</i>


T.runs throughls models the first .


<i><b> *Example:</b></i>


<i><b> She is tall and thin and she has long black hair.</b></i>


T. asks Ss to work ind with the cues feedback.


<i> *Answer:</i>


b. She is short and fat.



She has straight brown hair.
c. She is short and slim.


She has curly hair.
d. He is tall and fat.


He has curly black hair.


<b>3. Post- Speaking: </b><i><b> Listen P. 12-13:</b></i>


T asks Ss to read the dialogue and guess the
expressions and listen to the tape completing the
dialogue ind in pairs groups.


<i> *Answer:</i>


1. I’d like to meet you.
2.Nice to meet you.
3.I’d like to meet you.
4.It’s pleasure to meet you.
5.come and meet.


5. How do you do?


T plays the tape again and asks Ss to listen and check
their guessing feedback.


T. asks Ss to practice the dialouge in pairs in front of
the class.



Ss answer-listen to T’s model and
then repeat chorally- ind.Ss
answer about the stree and the
meaning as well.Ss copy down
into the notebook.


Ss look at the board for the cues
and then work individually make
sentences using the cues.


<i> </i>


.Ss read the open dialouge and
predict the missing expressions
ind.


Ss work ind. in pairs in groups,
listen to the tape for the
expressions stand up and read
alound the answers in front of the
class.


Ss work in pairs with the
completed dialouge.


<b>IV. Consolidation</b>: <i> Language Focus 3 P. 17 (workbook)</i>


T. asks Ss to discribe the people by answering the questions.


<b> V. Homework:</b>



Momorize vocabulary


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date :Sunday, August 22nd<sub>-2010 </sub>


Period: 4

<b>Unit 1: MY FRIENDS</b>


<i>Lesson 3 : Read ( P. 13 )</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to read a passage to
understand the main ideas and details of the text.


<b>I. Knowledges</b>: Simple Present Tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>: reading and speaking


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement</b>


<b> II.Revision: </b> <i><b>Brainstorm:</b></i>


T asks Ss to think of adjectives about characters of people and write down on the board.


<b> </b><i>hard-working</i>


<b> </b>


<b> </b><i><b> Characters</b></i>



<b> </b><i>kind</i>


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities </b>’


<b>1. Pre- Reading:</b>
<b>a.</b><i><b>Vocabulary:</b></i>


. character(N) : <i>(translation)</i>


. orphange( N ): <i>(expanation)</i>


. sense of humor : <i>(translation)</i>


.sociable (adj ): <i>(example)</i>


. reserved (adj) : <i>(translation) </i>


.(to) tell jokes : <i>(explanation)</i>


T. elicits models T. asks Ss to repeat
chorally and then individually.


T. reports on the board,then checks the
stress and meaning.


<i>*Checking vocab</i>: What and Where


b.T/ F statement prediction: (on poster)



<i>a.Ba has only three friends: Bao, Khai,</i>
<i>Song.</i>


<i>b.Ba and his friends have the same</i>
<i>charaters.</i>


<i>c.Bao, Khai, Song are quite reserved in</i>
<i>public.</i>


<i>d.They all enjoy school and study hard.</i>


T. asks Ss to look at the poster for the
given cues, then work in 2 groups and
predict the statements true(T) or false
(F).


<b>2. While- Reading</b>:


<i>a.Read and check:</i>


T asks Ss to read the text again and check
their predictions.


<i> * Answer</i>:


a. F b. F c. F d. T


<i>b.Multiple choice:</i> T ask 1 P.14



T asks Ss to read the text again and
choose the best options to complete the
sentences ind,then in pairs and in groups
feedback.


<i> * Answer</i>:


a. A b. C c. B d. D


Ss answer-listen to T’s model and then
repeat chorally- ind.Ss answer about
the stree and the meaning as well.Ss
copy down into the notebook.


Ss look at the poster for cues.


Ss work ind in pairs in groups to
predict if they are true or false.


<i>* Predict:</i>
<i> a. c.</i>
<i> b. d. </i>


Ss read and check their guesses ind.
then in pairs and in groups.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities </b>’
c.Comprehension questions: ex2p.14:


T.runs through the first question.



<i>*Example</i>:


<i>a</i>.<i>He feels lucky.</i>


T asks Ss to work in pairs, read the text
again asking and answering the
questions in pairs.


<i> * Answer</i>:


<i> b.Bao is the most sociable.</i>
<i> c.Khai likes reading.</i>


<i> d.Sometimes his jokes annoy his friends.</i>
<i> e.He spends his free time at a local</i>
<i>orphanage.</i>


<b>3. Post- Reading:</b>


T. asks Ss to work in groups to talk to
one another about their friends using the
adjectives they have just learned to
descibe.


T.models.


<i>*Example</i>: My close friend, Hoa is
kind...



T asks some Ss to represent in front of the
class.


Ss work in pairs, read the text again
and answer in pairs.


Ss work in groups to descibe their real
friends or partners.


<b>IV. Consolidation:</b><i>( Involved in the Post- Reading stage)</i>


<b>V . Homework:</b>


- Learn by heart vocabulary


- Read the text for detail answer the questions.
- Prepare Unit 1 : My Friends <i>( Write P. 15)</i>
<i> (Writing about oneself and other people)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date: Sunday, August 22nd<sub>-2010</sub>


Period : 5 <i> </i>

<i><b> </b></i>

<b>Unit 1: MY FRIENDS</b>


<i>Lesson 4 : Write ( P. 15 )</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b> By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write about oneself and
other people.


<b>I.Knowledge: </b> How to write a passage about oneself/ personal information.


<b>II.Skills: </b>Writing and reading


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement:</b> Greeting and check the attendance.


<b> II.Checking:</b>


*T asks Ss to read the text again and answer the question on page 14 (textbook)


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>I.Pre-Writing:</b>


*Reading comprehension questions
<i>(Write 1 P. 5)</i>


* Activity 1: Ss read the information and
the paragraph about Tam, then answer the
questions to check. ind.


.T. gives some questions:


<i> a. What s his name?</i>’


<i> b.How old is he?</i>


<i> c.What does he look like?</i>


<i> d.What is he like? </i>


<i> e.where does he live?</i>
<i> f.Who does he live with?</i>
<i> g.Who is his elder brother?</i>


Ss work ind. reading the information and
the text to answer the questions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
T. asks Ss to read the passage below in


comparision with their answers and how
to know more about how to write about
other people as a model.


<i>* Activity 2:</i> Task 2 P. 15 ( textbook)
T asks Ss to work in pairs to answer the
questions about their partner that are going
to be written and takes notes.


<b>II. While- Writing:</b>


T. saks Ss to work ind writng about their
partner using the notes in the activitiy 2.


<b>III.Post- Writing:</b><i>Correction</i>


T asks Ss to swap their writing and correct
mistakes for each other or asks Ss to write


the passage on the board and T elicits the
correction. And T give the feedback.


* <i>Suggested Writing</i>:


<i>Her/ His name is………and s/he is……</i>
<i>years old.S/he lives at (in)………with</i>
<i>her/her</i> <i>father,mother,elder</i> <i>sister</i>


<i>and……..</i> <i>S/He</i> <i>is……,</i>


<i>..and</i> <i>.has</i> <i>.,...</i> <i>hair</i>


<i>……</i> <i>……</i> <i>…</i> <i>…</i>


<i>Her/His best (close) friends are … ……..,</i> <i>..</i>


<i>and……</i>


Ss read the passage .


Ss work ind. for descsibing their friens
using the answers above.


Ss swap the writing with each other or
report on the board and correct each other.


Ss report the wrting into the notebook


IV. <b>Consolidation</b>:



<i>* Exercise 7 P. 11 (workbook)</i>


<b>V. Homework:</b>


- Complete the passage into the notebook.
- Complete Exercise 7 P.11.


- Prepare Unit 1 : My Friends ( Language Focus P. 16- 17 )
<i>( Simple Tenses, enough +to Vinf )</i>“ ”


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date: Sunday, August 22nd<sub>-2010</sub>


Period: 6 <i> </i>

<b>LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES :</b> By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to revise some studied
knowledge


<b>I.Knowledge: </b>- <i>Simple Tenses</i>


<i> - Present Tense to talk about general truths</i>
<i> - (not) adiective+ enough+to infinitive</i>


<b> II.Skills:</b> Speaking, Writing


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> Greeting and Check the attendance



<b> II. Checking:</b> (Within the duration of the lesson)


<b> </b>III.New Lesson:


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
Activity 1: <i>Simple Tenses P. 16</i>


T. asks Ss to recall all studied simple tenses.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
through.


T. models.


Example: <i>(0) lived</i>


T. asks Ss to work ind in pairs in
groups to complete the paragraphs using
the correct form of the verbs feedback.
Answer:


a. 1.<i>lives</i> 2.<i>sent</i> 3.<i>was</i> 4.<i>is</i>


b.1.<i>are</i> 2.<i>came</i> 3.<i>showed</i> 4.<i>introduced</i>


T. asks Ss to stand up and read alound the
paragraphs in front of the class.


Activity 2:



<i>Present Siple to talk about general truths</i>


T. asks Ss to recall the uses of the Simple
present and give a example sentence as
well.


T. leads in another ues of the tense is to talk
about general truths.


<i>NB:There are no adverbs or adverb phraes</i>
<i>in the sentences with the use.</i>


T. gives example or asks Ss to do it.
Example: <i>Water boils at 1000<sub>C.</sub></i>


T asks Ss to look at the dialouge,the given
verbs in the box and runs through.


T. models the first.
Example: <i>(0) rises</i>


T. asks Ss to work ind in pairs in
groups to complete the dialogue using the
correct form of the verbs feedback.


* Answer:


1<i>. sets</i> 4.<i>is</i>



2.<i>moves</i> 5.<i>is</i>


3.<i>moves</i> 6.<i>is</i>


T asks Ss to work in pairs with the copleted
dialogue.


* <b>Activity 3</b> : <i>(not) adj+enough+to Vinf</i>


T. asks Ss to look at the dialogue and
runs through.


T.asks Ss to complete the dialogues using


<i>(not) adjective+enough+to Vinf.</i>


T. models the first.
* Example:


<i>a.No.Lan is not big enough to carry</i>
<i>everything.</i>


T. asks Ss to work ind in pairs in
groups to complete the dialogue T.
gives the feedback.


* Answer:


<i>b.Ba is old enough to drive a car.</i>
<i>c.I;m strong enough to lift the box.</i>



<i>d.Ii don t think my English is good enough</i>’


<i>to be a member.</i>


T. asks Ss to work in pairs with the
completed dialogues.


Ss look at the paragraphs and listen to T’s
explanation and model as well.


Ss work ind in pairs in groups with the
paragraphs.


Ss stand up and practice reading the
paragraphs in front of the class.


Ss recall the uses of Simple Present and
give example sentences .


Ss listen to T. and copy down.


Ss work ind in pairs in groups with the
paragraphs.


Ss work ind in pairs in groups with the
dialogues.


Ss work in pairs with the dialogues in front
of the class.



Ss work ind in pairs in groups with the
paragraphs.


Ss work ind in pairs in groups with the
dialogues.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

IV.<b>Consolidation: </b><i>Excercse 5 P. 9 (workbook)</i>


T. asks Ss to combine each of the follwing pairs of the sentences into one,using (not)+
adjective + to Vinf.


*Example: <i>He is strong enough to carry the box.</i>


V.<b>Homework</b>:


-Revise studied tenses and (not)adjectives+enough+to Vinf
-Complete exercise 5 P.9 into the notebook.


-Prepare Unit 2 : Making Arrangements.


( section <i> Get ting started , Listen and Read P. 18-19 )</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


<b>---Unit 2 : MAKING ARRANGEMENTS</b>



<b>Tổng số 5 tiết</b>


1. Mục tiêu:<b> Sau khi hồn thành bài học, học sinh có thể</b>



<b>-</b> <b>Nói về dự định sẽ làm gì trong ngày nghỉ sắp tới.</b>
<b>-</b> <b>Sắp đặt kế hoạch qua điện thoại. </b>


<b>-</b> <b>Ghi lại lời nhắn qua điện thoại.</b>


2. Trọng tâm ngôn ngữ:


<b>-</b> <i><b>Going to – to talk about intentions and activities in the future.</b></i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i><b>Adverbs of place</b></i>


3. Từ vựng:<b> Các từ liên quan tới việc trao đổi thông tin</b>
<i><b>-</b></i> <i><b>device, directory, deaf – mute…</b></i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i><b>to conduct, to demonstrate. To transmit, to emigrate, to make an appointment, to</b></i>


<i><b>take a message</b></i>


4. Các kĩ năng cần đạt


<b>- Trao đổi qua điện thoại rủ bạn làm gì đó.</b>


<b>- Đọc hiểu về tiểu sử của người phát minh ra chiếc điện thoại.</b>
<b>- Nghe hội thoại ngắn và điền thông tin vào phiếu nhắn tin.</b>


<b>- Viết điền thơng tin vào chỗ trống để hồn thành lời nhắn qua điện thoại. </b>
<b>* Lưu ý: Đối với bài viết 1, học sinh yếu cần hiểu rõ nội dung tin nhắn rồi điền</b>
<b>vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành đoạn văn sau khi được giáo viên hướng dẫn thông</b>
<b>qua hệ thống câu hỏi gợi mở.</b>



<b>- Bài viết 2 có thể giao về nhà.</b>
<b>+ Học sinh khá giỏi: làm bài viết 3.</b>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date : Sunday, August 30th<sub>-2010</sub>


Period: 7 <i> </i>

<b>Unit 2</b>

:

<b>MAKING</b>

<b>ARRANGEMENTS</b>



<i> Lesson 1 : Section Getting Started P. 18 </i>


<i> Listen and Read P. 19</i>



<b>A</b>.<b>OBJECTIVES</b> : By the end of this lesson,Ss will be able to make and confirm an
agreement.


<b> I</b>.<b>Knowledge:</b> <i>Future with Be </i>“ –<i> going to </i>–<i> Vinf</i>”


<b> II</b>.<b>Skills</b> : Speaking and reading


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I</b>.<b>Settlement</b>: Greeting and Check the attendance.


<b> II.Checking:</b>


<i>* Combine each of the follwing pairs of the sentences into one,using (not)+ adjective </i>
<i><b>enough+ to Vinf.</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

*Answer:



<i>1. The weather is warm enough(for us) to go swimming.</i>
<i> 2. My brother isn t old enough to go to school.’</i>


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1.Warm- up:</b> <i>Getting Started P. 18</i>


T. asks Ss to match each object with its name ind.
T. has some Ss stand up and read their answers.


<i> *Answer:</i>


a. an answering machine
b. a mobile phone


c. a fax machine


d. a telephone directory
e. a public telephone
f. an address book.


<b>2. Presentation:</b>


T. uses the pictures on page 19 to set the
scene:”<i>Nga is phoning Hoa to invite her to go to</i>
<i>the movies.</i>”



<i>*Vocab: </i>


(to) be on : <i>chiếu ( phim,…) </i>
<i>*Example:</i>


The film “<i>Tom and Jerry</i>” will be on T.V at 5.30
tomorrow.


T. asks Ss to listen to the dialogue.


<b>3. Practice:</b>


<i>Activity 1</i>:T. gets Ss to practice the dialogue with
a partner and the stand up and read in front of
the class.


<i>Activity 2</i>: <i> Task 2 P.19 (Textbook)</i>


T. asks Ss to read the dialogue again ang decide
who did and said each of the following things ind
in pairs feedback.


<i> *Answer:</i>


a. Nga made the call.
b.Nga introduced herself.


c.Nga invited the other to the movies.
d .Nga arranged the meeting place.
e.Hoa arranged the time.



f.Nga agreed to the time.
T.asks some more questions:
* What would you say when you:


<i> - want to invite S.O to do S.T</i>
<i> - want to arrange a meeting place</i>
<i> - want to arrange the time</i>


<b>4.Furthe Practice:</b><i>MappedDialogue(on poster)</i>


LAN NAM
Can/speak/Nam? Hello/Lan.
This/ Lan.


I/go/zoo/afternoon


Would/come/me? OK/loveto/where/
meet?


Let’s/bus stop OK/6.30/all right?
Fine/Bye Bye/see you


T. runs elicit models T. asks Ss to repeat
chorally, then ind


T. asks Ss to work in open closed pairs.
T gives the feedback.


Ss look at the objects and the given


words/phrases.


Ss work ind. Matching each object
with its name.


Ss stand up and read alound the
answers,then copy down into the
notebook.


Ss look at the pictures and listen to T.


Ss copy down.


Ss listen to the tape or T’s model
Ss work in pairs with the dialogue.


Ss read the text again and answer the
questions in pairs.


Ss copy the answers into the
notebook.


Ss look at the words in the just studied
and answer the questions.


<i>-Would you like to….?</i>


<i>-Let s meet’</i> <i>…/Where shall we</i>
<i>meet…?</i>



<i>-Is 6.15 all right?</i>


Ss look at the poster and listen to
T.Then Ss answer T’s questions
listen to T’s model repeat in chorus
ind.


Ss work in open closed pairs.


<b>IV. Consolidation:</b><i>Exercise 1 P.13 (workbook)</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

<b>V. Homework:</b>


- Read the text for details and answer the questions.
- Memorize “Be + going - to Future”


- Revise how to make and confirm an arrangment.
- Complete Exercise 1 P.13 into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 2 : Making Arrangements <i>( </i>Section <i>Speak and Listen P.20- 21)</i>
<i>(Talking about the intention with Be </i>–<i> going to )</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date: Sunday, August 30th<sub>-2010</sub>


Period : 8

<b> </b>

<b>Unit 2:</b>

M

<b>AKING ARRANGEMENTS</b>



<i> </i>

<i> Lesson 2: Speak and Listen P.20</i>




<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about intention and fill in the
missing information in the dialogue.


<b> I. Knowledge: </b><i> To be going to arrangement and talk about intention.</i>“ ”


<i> </i><b>II. Skills:</b> Speaking and listening.


<b>B. PROCEDURE</b>:


<b> I. Settlement:</b> - Greetings and checking the attendance.
II.<b>Revision:</b> * Survey<b>:</b>


T.asks Ss to move around the class and ask their classmates these questions.
a. What’s your name?


b. Have you got a telephone?
c. What your telephone number?


<i>Name</i> <i>Yes/ No</i> <i> Telephone number</i>


<i>1</i> <i>Khanh</i> <i> 053.621154</i>


<i>2</i>
<i>3</i>


III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’



<b>1. Pre-speaking:</b>


<i>a. Activity 1: </i><b>* </b>Ordering statements:
T. runs through and models.


Ex: 1-b ; 2-f


T.asks Ss to put the sentences into the correct
order to make a complete conversation ind
then in pairs.


T.gives the feedback.


<i>Answer key:</i>


1.b 2.f 3.j 4.a 5.i 6. c
7.e 8.k 9.g 10.h 11.d


<i>b. Activity 2: </i>Practice speaking the dialogue
T gets Ss to work in pairs with the completed
dialogue.


<b>2. While-speaking:</b>


<i>a. Setting the scene:</i>


T. asks Ss to look at the picture in the
textbook and answer the questions.



<i>.How many people are talking together in</i>
<i>this dialogue?</i>


<i>.What are their names?</i>


<i>. What are they talking about?</i>
<i>b. Role-play: (Task 2)</i>


T asks Ss to work individually to complete
the dialogue by using useful phrases to make
similar arrangements.


T has Ss work in pairs.


<i>* Possible answer:</i>


<i>1. Can I speak to Ba, please? This is Bao.</i>
<i> 2. I m fine. Thanks. How about you?’</i>


Ss look at the textbook and listen to T.
Ss work ind and then in pairs putting the
sentences for a good dialogue.


Ss stand up and read their answer ,then
copy into the notebook.


Ss work in open-colsed pairs with the
completed dialogue.


Ss listen to T.,and then answer T’s


questions.


Ss work ind. And in pairs then in groups
filling in the gaps with suitable phrases or
sentences.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<i> 3. Can you play chess with me tonight? </i>
<i> 4. How about tomorrow afternoon?</i>
<i> 5. Let s play at the central chess club.</i>’


<i> 6. Is 2 o clock all right?</i>’


T. calls some pairs to stand up and practice
the dialogue in front of the class.


<b>3. Post-speaking</b><i>:</i> * Listening:


T.asks Ss to listen to the tape and fill in the
missing in formation .


T. gives Ss some key phrases.


<i>.(to) leave a message</i>
<i>.(to) make an arrangement</i>


T. asks Ss to work ind., then share in pairs
and in groups.



T.gives the feedback.


<i><b>. </b></i>Answer key:


KINGSTON JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL


<i>Date</i>: Tuesday <i>Time</i>: 9.45


<i>Message:</i> Mrs. Mary Nguyen wanted to
see you at 9.45 in the morning.


<i>Tel. Number:</i> 64683720942


<b>IV.Consolidation:</b>Exercise 3 P.14


<i> *Example: a.They are going to go </i>
<i>fishing.</i>


Ss work in open-colsed pairs with the
completed dialogue.


Ss listen to the conversation and fill in the
missing information.


Ss stand up and read alound the answer
and then copy into the notebook.


<b>V. Homework</b>:


<b> </b>- Revise how to make arranements


and talk about intention with


<i>Going To</i>


“ ”


- Exercises 3,4 on pages 16 and 17
(workbook).


- Prepare Unite 2: Making
arrangements ( section Read P21-22 )
<i>( The biograhy of a famous </i>
<i>inventor- Alexander Graham Bell)</i>


Date: Sunday, September 5th<sub> - 2010</sub>


Period : 9

Unit 2:

<b> MAKING ARRANGEMENTS</b>


<i> Lesson 3</i>

<i>: </i>

<i>Read P.21- 22</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the main ideas and details of
the text.


<b> I. Knowledge: </b><i>Biography of a famous inventor. </i>
<i> </i><b>II. Skills:</b> Reading and speaking.


<b>B. PROCEDURE</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b> - Greeting and check the attendance.


II.<b>. Revision: * Brainstorming:</b>


*T.asks Ss to think of the use of the phone and fill in the nets.


<i> What is telephone </i>


<i> used for? to chat with friends</i>


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1.Pre-reading:</b>


<i>a. Pre-teach:</i>


- (to) emigrate: <i>( Explanation)</i>
- (to) transmit <i>( Translation) </i>


- (to) conduct<i>: (Translation)</i>


- (to) demonstrate: <i>( Explanation) </i>


- device (n) : <i>( Example)</i>


- deaf-mute( n ) : <i>(Explanation)</i>


T. elicits models T. asks Ss to repeat chorally
and then individually.



T. reports on the board,then checks the stress and
meaning.


<i>*Checking vocab</i>: What and Where


<i>b. T/F statement prediction:(On poster)</i>


a. Alexander G. Bell was born in the USA.


b. He work with deaf-mute patients in a hospital.
c. Thomas Watson was Bell’s assistant.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
d. Bell and Watson introduced the telephone in


1877.


e. Bell experimented with ways of transmitting
speech between deaf-mutes a long distance.
f. Bell demonstrated his invention at a lot of
exhibition.


T.runs through and asks Ss to predict the
statements true or false.


<b>2. While- reading:</b>


<i>a. Activity 1:</i> * Check the prediction:


T.has Ss work ind then in pairs and in groups,read


the text again and check their statements.


T. asks Ss to correct the false statements.
T.gives the feedback.


* Answer key:


a. F <i>(….in Edinburgh/Scotland)</i>


b. F <i>(…in a university) </i>


c. T


d. F<i>(…in 1876)</i>


e. F <i>(..trasmitting speech b/t a long distance)</i>


f. T


<i>b. Activity 2:</i> * Ordering statements:
T. runs through.


T. asks Ss to read the text again and put the
statements in the correct orderind ,then share in
paits and in groups.


T. gets Ss to stand up and read their answer.
T.gives the feedback.


<i>* Key: 1 d, 2 e, 3 a, 4 g, 5 c, 6 d, 7 f</i>



<b>3.Post-speaking: </b> * Role play:


T. asks Ss to work in closed pairs. One student
makes questions and another gives the


answers,then fill in the table.


Date of birth <i>March 3, 1847</i>


Place of birth <i>Edinburgh,S cotland</i>


Address <i>America</i>


Assistant <i>Thomas Watson</i>
Date of telephone invention <i><sub>1876</sub></i>


Student A : <i>Interviewer</i> Student B: <i>Interviewee</i>


When was you born? I was born in March3,1847
Where was you born? I was born in ...


...


Ss look at the poster and listen to T.
Ss work in 2 teams and predict the
statetements true or false.


Ss work in 2 groups, read the text
again and check their prediction.


Ss stand up and read alound their
answer true or false and correct the
false ones as well.


Ss copy into the notebook.


Ss look at the notebook and listen to
T.


Ss work ind,then in pairs and the
groups ordering the statements.
Ss atand up and read the answer.
Ss copy down.


Ss work in pairs,ask and answer
filling in the table.


<b>IV.Consolidation:</b>(involved in Post-Speaking stage)


<b>V. Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Read the text again and answer for details and ideas.


- Prepare Unit 2 : making arrangements ( section Write P.18-19 )


<i> (How to write a message)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>



Date: Sunday, September 5th<sub> - 2010</sub>


Period : 10

<b>Unit 2: </b>

<b>MAKING ARRANGEMENTS</b>



<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 4: Write P. 18 - 19</i>



<b> A.OBJECTIVES</b>: <i> </i>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write a message
<b>I. Knowledges</b>:<i> How to write a massage</i>


<b> II.Skill</b>: writing


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

<b> I.Settlement: </b>Greetingand check the attendance


<b> II.Revision / warm - up : </b>


<i> *T writes the letters on board and asks Ss to reorder to make the meaningful words.</i>


MCUESTOR = customer AYDDMI = midday
ESSGMEA = message REDOR = order


NIFURNITURE = furniture RSEICE = service


<b> III.New Lesson:</b>


<b>Teachers activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1.Pre- writing:</b>


<i>a.Pre-teach:</i> - delivery service


(explanation)


- stationary (translation):


- (to) pick someone up (example):


T. elicits models T asks Ss to repeat in chorus
and then individually.


T. checks stress and gives the meaning.
*<i>Checkvocab</i>: R.O.R


<i>b.Gap fill: </i>


T. asks Ss to read the message and fill in the gaps
in the message p.23 individually and then share
dieas with the partners. (text book)


<i>*Answer:</i>


1. telephone 5. name
2. May-12 6. delivery
3. speak 7. Mr Ha
4.took 8. at


T. asks Ss to read the passagein front of the class.


<b>2.While- Writing</b>:


T. runs through the passage and asks Ss to read the


telephne passage for information to write the
message on P.23 individuaaly , in pairs and then in
groups.


T.asks Ss to read the massage in front of the class
and T gives the feedback.


<i><b>THANH CONG DELIVERY SERVICE</b></i>


Date : June 16
Time : after midday
For : Mrs Lien


Massage: Mr Nam called about his stationary
order.He wants you to call him at 8 634 082
Taken : Mr Toan


3.<b>Post- writing</b>: * Correction


T. asks Ss to read the massage alound or report it
on the board and elicits the correction


from Ss.


Ss answer-listen to T’s model and
then repeat chorally- ind.Ss answer
about the stree and the meaning as
well.Ss copy down into the notebook.


Asks Ss to read the message and fill


in the gaps in the message p.23
individually and then share dieas
with the partners.


Asks Ss to write the message using
the information from the passage in
write 2 on p.23 individuaaly, in pairs
and then in groups


Ss can read the massage aloud in
front of the class or report on the
board and correct for each other.


<b>IV. Consolidation </b>(involved in <i>Post - Writing</i> stage)


<b>V. Homework</b>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date: Sunday, September 5th<sub> - 2010</sub>


Period:11

Unit 2 :

<b>MY FRIENDS</b>



<i> Lesson 5: Language Focus P.25 -26</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: </b>By the end of the lesson ss will be able to talk about intentions and
the position.


<b> I. Knowledge</b><i><b>: </b></i>“<i>Be going to future and adverbs of place.</i>”



<i><b> </b></i><b>II. Skills</b><i><b>:</b></i><b> </b>Speaking and writing.


<b>B. PROCEDURE</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b> - Greetings


- Checking students’ attendance


<b> II. Revision: </b>*<i>Lucky number</i>:


* T. asks Ss to use the form “...enough...” and combine these sentences.


<i> a. She isn t old. She can go to school.</i>’


<i> b. The ice is quite thick. We can walk on it.</i>
<i> c. I haven t enough money. I can t buy that car.</i>’ ’


<i> d. It wasn t very warm. We couldn t sit on the garden.</i>’ ’


<i> e. Lan is clever. She can draw this picture.</i>


3 -<b> </b>a 6 . d 7. LN 1 - b 5 - e 8 . LN 2 - g 4 – c 9 - LN


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teachers activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<i>1. Be-going to to talk about intention</i>“ ”


T asks Ss to recall “Be-going to” form,uses


and example sentences.


T. runs through and models.
* Ex: <i>She s going to see a movie.</i>’


T.asks Ss to use the form ”<i>Be going to</i>” to say
what the people are going to do.


T. calls some Ss to stand up and read the
answer.


*<i> Answer key:</i>


a. They are going to go fishing.


b. She is going to read the new novel.
c. He is going to do his homework in math.
d. He is going to watch an interesting action
movie on TV tonight.


e. She is going to give him a nice birthday
present.


<i>2. Task 2 P.25 </i>*Survey :


T asks Ss to copy the table in their paper and
go around the classroom to ask their partners,
then filling in the table.


What are you going to do on the weekend?


<i>Are you going to...</i> Who
see a movie? <i>Hoa</i>


play sports?


meet your friends?
help your parents?
do your homework?
watch TV?


play games?


T.asks Ss to read the table.


Ex: <i>Hoa s going to help her parents.</i>’


<i>3. Adverb of Place:</i>


T. runs though the pictures and models.
Ex: a) <i>upstairs</i>


T. asks Ss to complete the bubbles with


Ss recall the “Be-going to” future.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in groups.


Ss stand up and read the answers about
the intentions.



Ss copy down.


Ss work in groups of four for completing
the “<i><b>you </b></i>” .


Ss read the resuls of the survey in front of
the class.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

<b>Teachers activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
adverbs of place ind.,then share in pairs and


in groups.T.gives the feedback.
*<i>Answer:</i>


b. here e. there
c. downstairs. f. inside


<i> </i>d <i>. </i>outside<i> </i>


adverb of place.


<b>IV. Consolidation</b>: Exercise 3 P. 16 (workbook)


T. asks Ss to write sentences about Bs’s plan ind.,then share in pairs nad in groups.
*Ex: <i>Nam is going to listen to music.</i>


<b>IV. Homework</b>:


Revise “Be-going to” future.
Complete exercise 3 P.16 into the notebook.



Prepare Unit 3 : At Home (Section <i>Getting started P.27,listen and read P.28</i>)


<i> ( Talking about chores using modals )</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 12<i> </i>

<b>Unit 3 : AT HOME</b>



<i><b> </b></i>

<i>Lesson 1: Section Getting started P. 27</i>



<i> Listen and Read P.27 </i>

<i> 28 </i>


<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b> : By the end of this lesson,Ss wil be able to talk about chores.
<b> I.Knowledge</b> : Modals : Have to/Has to , must , ought to


<b>II</b>.<b>Skills</b> : Listening and Speaking


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b>I</b>.<b>Settlement</b>: Greeting and check the attendance.


<b>II</b>. <b>Checking</b>: Excercisen 3 P. 16 (talking about Ba’s plan using “Be-going to”


<b> III.New Lesson:</b>


<b>Teachers activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
1.Getting started :



T. runs though and models the first.


Ex: a) Washing dishes/ doing the washing- up
T. asks Ss to write the chores they often do at home
ind., then share in pairs and in groups.


T. asks Ss to stand up and read the answers.And T.
gives the feedback.


* Answer:


b)making the bed.
c) sweeping the floor.
d)cooking meals.
e)tidying up


f)feeding the chickens
2.Presentation:


a.Pre-teach:


- cupboard (n) <i>(picture)</i>


- steamer (n) <i>(picture)</i>


- saucepan (n) <i>(picture)</i>


- have to / has to<i>(explanation/example )</i>


T. elicits models T asks Ss to repeat in chorus


and then individually.


T.checks the stress and the meaning,then report on
the board.


* Check vocab: R.O.R
b .Presentation Dialogue :


T. uses the dialogue to set the scene.Then asks Ss
to listen to the tape or T’s model.


c.Open – prediction:


T. asks Ss to predict what Ba has to do in 2 teams.


<i> * Model sentences:</i>


I <i>have to</i> go and visit grandma after work.


Ss look at the pictures,then work ind
and share in pairs and the ni groups
wrting the chores.


Ss answer-listen to T’s model and
then repeat chorally- ind.Ss answer
about the stree and the meaning as
well.Ss copy down into the
notebook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

<b>Teachers activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


He <i>has to</i> go and visit grandma after work.


<i> ought to</i>


<i> *Form: S + Vm + Vinf</i>


<b>3</b>.<b>Practice</b>: <i>Picture Cue Drill ( P.27)</i>


T.asks Ss to use the modals and the verb phrases at
the Getting Startd stage to talk about chores in
pairs.


*Example Exchange:
1. What do you have to do?
I have to wash the dishes.
2.What does she has to do?
She has to wash the dishes.


T.calls so meSs to stand up and practice speaking
about the chores.


4.Further Practice:<i> Excercise 1 P.20</i>
<i> Excercise 2 P.21</i>


T.models.


<i>* Example: </i>I have to go home.


T.asks Ss to work ind.,in pairs and then in groups
to practice using the modals.



Ss work in groups and predict what
Ba do while the mother is out.


Ss work ind then in pairs and in
groups talking about the chores
using the verbs phrases and the
modals.


Ind., Ss do the excercises.


<b>IV. Consolidation: </b>(involved in the Further Practice Stage)


<b>V. Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Revise the form and uses of the modals.
- Complete exercise 1 and 2 into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 3 : At home – Section Speak and Listen P.28 – 30.


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:13 <i> </i>

<b>Unit 3 : AT HOME</b>


<i> Lesson 2 : Speak </i>

<i> P 28, 29</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b> : By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use the suggestion


structure to talk about the position of the furniture in the room.


<b> I</b>.<b>Knowledge</b>: Prepositions of place: on , above……


<b> II.Skills</b>: Speaking


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement</b>: Greeting and check the attandence.


<b> II.Revision</b>: Jumbled Words


SHICON = cushion HCOUC = couch
PELOTEHEN = telephone ROTESE = stereo


<b> III.New Lesson:</b>


<b>Teachers activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1.Pre- Speaking:</b>


a.Pre-teach:


<i> - rug ( n ) - picture</i>


- <i>calendar</i> ( n ) - <i>picture</i>
<i> - dish-rack (n) - picture</i>


- <i>folder</i> (n ) - <i>picture</i>



- <i>wardrobe</i> ( n ) - <i>picture</i>


T. elicits models T asks Ss to repeat in
chorus and then individually.T.checks the
stress,meaning and copy on the board.


* Checking : Matching (using pitures /28 )
b. Task 1 P28 ( Text book )


T. asks Ss to look at the picture and
models.


Ex: The sink is next to the stove.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

<b>Teachers activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
T. asks Ss to work ind.,in pairs and then in


groups talking about the position of each
iterm.T. calls some Ss to stand up and
practice talking the position of the furniture
in the picture.T. gives the feedback.


* Possible answer:


-The calendar is on the wall,under the
clock and above the refrigerator.


-The cupboard is on the wall,above the
counter.



-The knives are on the wall,under the
cupboard.


-The clock is on the wall,above the
calendar.


-The bowl of the fruit is between the rice
cooker and the dish rack.


<b>2.While- Speaking:</b>Task 2P.29(Textbook)
T. asks Ss to look at the picture and runs
through.T. asks Ss to recall some structure
for making suggestions.


T. models.
*Example:


<i>Let s put the armchair opposite the couch.</i>’
T.has Ss to arrange the furniture ind.,in
pairs and their in groups.


T. asks Ss to stand up and practice speaking
in front of the class.


T. gives the feedback.


<i>* Possible Answer:</i>


-Let’s put the clock on the wall, above the
piture.



- Let’s put the telephone and the lamp on a
small table next to the couch.


-I think we should put the shelf at the
corner,opposite the couch.


What about putting the T.V and the stereo
on the shelf.


<b>3.Post- Speaking:</b> picture discribing.


<b>- </b>Teacher gives a picture of a bedroom.
Asks students to write sentences to discribe
it.


- Asks students to say aloud their
sentences.


- correct the mistakes.


Ss talking about the position of the iterms in
the pictures.


Ss recall some structures for making
suggestions.


<i>-Let s + Vinf</i>’


<i>-What about + Ving…</i>



<i>-I think we should/ought to…</i>


Ss work in pairs practice making
suggestions about the position of the
furnitures.


- Discribe the picture


<b>IV. Consolidaton:</b>
<b>V. Homework:</b>


- Revise studied strustures for giving suggestion.
- Complete the suggestions (task 2) into the notebook.
- Prepare Unit 3 : At Home – Listen P.


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:14 <i> </i>

<b>Unit 3 : AT HOME</b>


<i> Lesson 3 : Listen </i>

<i> P 30</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b> : By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to order the recipe to make
the “Special fried rice”.


<b> I</b>.<b>Knowledge</b>: How to make a recipe and how to make the “Special fied rice”


<b> II.Skills</b>: Listening



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

<b> I.Settlement</b>: Greeting and check the attandence.


<b> II.Revision</b>: Review of some food and equipment for cooking


<b> III.New Lesson:</b>


<b>Teachers activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<i><b>Warm up</b></i>


<i>S. asked to describe one of their rooms</i>
<i><b>1. Pre- Listening:</b></i>


- S. tell the name of some food. These
questions can be raised” What do you often
have for breakfast?/ for lunch?/ for dinner?.
Do you have fried rice?”


- T says,” You want to cook fried rice. What
kinds of food will you need?”


- S. answer and write them on the board.
- T. show S pictures in the textbook and ask
S what they are then give the names of the
items in the pictures which S do not know.
-T introduces the situation of the listening
by saying” We’re going to listen to the
conversation between Mrs. Tu and Lan .
Mrs Tu is guiding Lan how to cook a dish.
Look at the items in the pictures, jot down


which dish and the items they need?”


<b>2. While- Listening:</b>


- Ps listen to the tape (twice), identify the
correct information.


<b>3. Post- Listening:</b>


- Ps compare their task with their earlier
guessing.


- T checks some Ps tasks.


- Ps listen to the tape again to correct their
task.


- T evaluates and gives the key.


- T gives each students in which there is an
open dialogue, ask them to listen then
complete it.


<b>4. Summary:</b>


<b>-</b> T sumarizes the content of the lesson,
evaluate the Ps' listening, give marks to
some active S.


- Name some food



- answer


- Name the things in the picture.


Ss listen to the tape and check the iterms for
“Special fried rice” ind.,then in pairs and in
groups.


a) fried rice
b) pan


c) garlic and green pepper
d) ham and peas


<b>IV. Homework: </b>


<b>- </b>Write a dialogue which tells how to cook the dish they like.
- Prepare Unit 3 : At Home – Section Read P.31- 32


<i> ( the safety precautions in the kitchen)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period :15<b> </b>

<b>Unit 3: </b>

<b>AT HOME</b>



<i><b> </b></i>

<i>Lesson 4: Read P.31- 32</i>




<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to under stand the main and
details ideas of the text about the precautions in the kitchen.


<b> I. Knowledge:</b>Why….? - Because…


<b> II. Skills:</b>Reading and speaking


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>
<b> I. Settlement:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

-T. asks Ss to work out the danger in home for the children then fill in the nets.


<i> drug Danger in the home for children elictric</i>




<i> knife fire</i>




<b> III. New lesson</b>


<b>Teachers activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Pre-reading:</b>


a.Pre-teach:


<i>- (to) destroy (translation) : </i>
<i>- (to) injure (translation): </i>


<i>- socket (n) (picture): </i>
<i>- bead (n) (realia): t</i>
<i>- object (n) (example): </i>
<i>- scissors(n) (realia): </i>
<i>- precaution(n(translation): </i>


T. elicits models T asks Ss to repeat in
chorus and then individually.


T.checks the stress and meaning,then reports on
the board.


*Check vocab: R.O.R


b.True / False Statements Prediction:


<i>1.It is safe to leave the medicine around the </i>
<i>house.</i>


<i>2.Drug can look like candy.</i>


<i>3.A kitchen is a suitable place to play.</i>


<i>4.Playing with one match cannot start a fire.</i>
<i>5.Putting a knife into a socket is dangerous.</i>
<i>6.Young children donot understand many </i>
<i>dangerous hosehold objects are dangerous.</i>


T. runs through and asks Ss to predict the
staements true or false in 2 teams.



<b>2. While-Reading:</b>


<i>* Activity 1: </i>Read and check :


T. asks Ss to read the text again and check their
prediction and correct the false ones as well.


<i>* </i>Answer<i>:</i>


1<i>-</i> F <i>(….to keep medicine in locked cup...</i> )
2- T


3- F <i> (A kitchen is a dangerous place toplay.)</i>


4- F(<i> Playing with one match can cause a fire.)</i>


5- T
6- T


Ss answer-listen to T’s model and then
repeat chorally- ind.Ss answer about
the stree and the meaning as well.Ss
copy down into the notebook.


Ss listen to T. and then work in 2
teams,predict the statements true or
false.


Ss read the text again and check their


prediction.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

<b>Teachers activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
* <i>Activity 2 </i>: Why…..? – Because……


T. runs through,then asks Ss to read the text
again and answer the questions in pairs.
T.calls somes pairs to stand up and practice
asking and answering the questions.


T. gives the feedback.


*Answer:


<i>b.Because the kitchen is a dangerous place to </i>
<i>play.</i>


<i>c.Because playing with one match can cause a </i>
<i>fire.</i>


<i>d.Because children mustn t put anything into </i>’


<i>the electric socket.Electric cankill.</i>


<i>e.Because the dangerous objects can injure or </i>
<i>kill children.</i>


<b>3. Post-reading:</b>* Discussion


T.asks Ss to talk about the safety precautions in


their house ind.,then in pairs and in groups.
T.can models firstly.


Ex:- <i>We should put the knives out of children </i>
<i>reach.</i>


T. call some Ss to stand up and read alound the
answer in front of the class.


Ss read the text again for


information ,ask and answer the
questions in pairs.


Ss work in group for discussion.


<b>IV. Consolidation: </b>(involved)


<b>V. Home work:</b>


- Memorise vocab.


- Read the text again about the percautions in the home and answer the questions.
- Prepare Unit 3 : At Home – Section Write P.32- 33


<i> (description of a room)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:



Period<b> </b>:16<b> </b>

<b>Unit</b>

<b>3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>AT HOME</b>



<i> Lesson 5:WriteP 32-33</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>By the end of this lesson ,Ss will be able to write a description of a
room.


<b> I. Knowledge:</b><i>Prepositions of place: on / to the lelf (right) of/oppsite/in the middle of.</i>


<b> II. Skills:</b>Writing


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I. Settlement:</b> Greeting and check the attendance.


<b> II. Revison: *</b><i>Wordsquare</i>


* T asks Ss to work ind and then in 2 groups
finding out the positions in the word-square.


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


F D N I H E B O


R A E N E X T O


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

<b>Teachers activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Pre - reading</b>



a. Pre-teach:
a sink (picture)


a towel-rack (picture)


a lighting fixture (picture/realia)
beneath (symnonym under/below)
T uses techniques to elicit each word
T reads each word 3 times


T writes on board and asks Ss the meanings
and the mark stress


Check vocab: R.O.R


b.Reading comprehension:


T.asks Ss to read the text to get information
(part 1 p.32) about the description of Hoa’s
room and answer the questions


<b>Questions:</b>


a/ What is on the lift of the room ?
b/ What are on the desk ?


c/ What is near the desk ?.
d/ What is beside the window ?



<b>2. While </b>–<b> Writing:</b>


- T.asks Ss to look at the picture and the
cues on page 33 to write a description of the
kitchen.


T.asks Ss to share ind.,then in pairs and in
groups.


* Possible answers:


<i>This is Hoa s kitchen.There is a refrigerator</i>’


<i>in the right corner of the room. Next to the</i>
<i>refrigerator is the oven and the stove.Onthe</i>
<i>other side of the stove,there is a sink and</i>
<i>next to the sink is a towel-rack.The dish</i>
<i>rack is on the counter,to the right of the</i>
<i>window and beneath the shelf.On the shelf</i>
<i>and on the counter, beneath the</i>
<i>window,there are jars of sugar, flour and</i>
<i>tea.In the middle of the room, there is a</i>
<i>table and four chairs.The lighting fixture is</i>
<i>above the table and beneath the lighting</i>
<i>fixture is a vase with flowers.</i>


<b>3. Post </b>–<b> Writing</b>:


<b>* Exhibition:</b>



T. asks Ss to stick their writing on the board
and correct for each other .


Listen and repeat in choral, in groups and
in dividually.


Then Copy down on their notebooks


Read the text (page 32 to answer
questions


a/ a desk


b/ Many flowers.
c/ a bed


d/ a wardrobe


Basing on picture and the cues description
of the kitchen on P.33 to discribe kitchen
in dividually, in pairs


Ss stick or report their writing on the
board and then correct for each other .


<b>IV. Consolidation: </b> Do Task 3-P33 (textbook)


<b>V. Home work:</b>


- Complete Ex 3 (page 33 text book)



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

- Prepare Unit 3: At home-( Lesson 4: Language focus-P34-35)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period<b>:</b>17<b> </b>

<b>Unit 3</b>

<b>:</b>

<b>AT HOME</b>



<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 4: Language focus</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES:</b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to revise and further practice
in some points that Ss have learnt.


<b>I. Knowledge:</b>+ Modal verbs: must, have to, ought to
+ Why - Because.


<b>II. Skills:</b>Speaking and writing


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b>I. Settlement:</b> Greeting and checking the attendance.


<b>II. Checking :</b>


<i> a/ She / must / go / school.</i>


<i> b/ I / ought / to / play sport.</i>


<b>III. New lesson:</b>



<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Modals:</b>


- T retells the way to use “must, have to, ought
to” by asking some questions.


a/ What do you have to do in the morning ?
b/ What must you do before you go to school ?
T.asks Ss to complete the dialogue by putting
“<i>haveto/must</i>” in the correct blank(number 1
page 34)


<b>* </b><i>Answer</i>


1. must / have to tidy...
2. have to / must dust...
3. must / have to sweep...
4. must / have to clean...
5. have to / must empty...
6. must / have to feed...


<b>2.Ought to + V</b>inf : <i>(For giving advice)</i>


Ex: I fail my English test.


<i> You ought to study harder.</i>


T.asks Ss to give advice to these people in the


pictures (2,35)


<b>3.Reflexive Pronouns:</b>


T. asks Ss to complete the dialogue by using
reflexive pronouns.


<i>Example:</i>1.ourselves


<i>* Answer:</i>


2. myself 4. himself


3. yourself 6. themselves
5. herself 7. yourselv<i>es </i>


<b>4. Why </b>–<b> Because :</b><i> </i>


T. uses the pictures on page 36 ,ask and answer


- Answer these questions
a/ I have to clean my bike.
b/ I must do myhome work.


- Work in pairs to complete the
dialogue.


- Role play. / Practice dialogue.


Ss work ind. to advice to these people.


* <i>Answer:</i>


b/ You ought to get up early.


c/ You ought to eat more fruit and
vegetables.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
the questions.


Example:


<i>Why did Hoa go to school late this morning ?</i>
<i>Because she she watched T.V late last night.</i>


T asks Ss to do Task 4 P36


<i>* Answer:</i>


b. Why did Nam have to cook dinner?
Because his mom went home late.
c.Why did Mrs Vui come home late?


Because she had to go and visit his grandma.
d.Why did Hoa fail her English test?


Because she played the video games instead
of learning English.


e. Why couldn’t Nga go to the movies?


Because she had to clean the house.


Ss answer the question:


Ss work in pairs to do exercise 4 P36
S1: Why did Nam have to cook
dinner ?


S2: Because his mother was home late.


<b>IV. Consotidation:</b>


Modal verbs,Why - Because


<b>V. Home work</b>


Revise all studied points.
Do ex 3 P.23 ( in workbook)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 18

<b>REVISION</b>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES</b>


By the end of this lesson,Ss will be able to revise and further practice what they have
learnt.



<b>I. Knowledge:</b>.<i> Simple present tense/ Simple past tense .</i>
<i> . Modal verbs</i>


<i>. Why - Because</i>
<i>. Reflecive pronouns</i>
<i>. Enough + to Vinf</i>


<b>II. Skills:</b>Speaking and writing


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b>I. Settlement: </b> Greeting and check the attendance.


<b>II. Checking: </b><i>( No checking )</i>


<b>IV New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>* Task 1:</b>


<i>* Supply the correct form or tenseof the </i>
<i>verbs:</i>


1.They(study)……..in the library now.
2.Let’s(go)….to English club.


3.Everyday,my father(travel)….to work
by bus.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
8.My brother(be)….a engineer.


9.Next year,my sister(be)….a teacher.
10.What about(visit)…..Ha Long Bay?
T. asks Ss to recall the forms of the tenses
that they have studied in the program of
English 7.


T.runs through models the first. Ss stand
up and read alound the answers.


Ex: 1.<i> are studying</i>


T asks Ss to work ind in pairs in
groups.


T. gives the feedback.
* <i>Answer:</i>


2.go 6.went
3.travels 7.collecting
4.were 8.is


5.can swim 9.will be/is going to be
10.visiting


<b> * Task 2:</b>


<i>2. Use reflexive pronouns</i>



a. She does it ...


b. They go to school ...
c. I cook dinner ...
d. You must learn EL ...


* <i>Answer:</i>


a. herself c.myself
b.themseves d.yourself


<b>* Task 3:</b>


<i>3. Rewrite these sentences, use cue words.</i>


T. asks Ss to write these sentences, use cue
words.


a. Huy was ill (He, ought / doctor)
b. I don’t go out with you because
I must do my home work (why)
c. Tuan is strong. He can lift the heavy


box (enough)


<i>* Answer:</i>


a.He ought to see a doctor.



b. Why don’t you go out with me?


c.Tuan isn’t strong enough to lift the box.


Answer the questions individually
a. I went to the zoo.


b. No, I didn’t do it myself.
c. Because I missed the bus.


Work ind. --> in pairs to do the exercises
a. Went


b. is going to go
c. plays


Ss work ind. to do the exercises
a. herself


b. themselfes
c. myself
d. yourself


Ss work individual to rewrite these sentences,
use cue words


<b>IV. Consolidation: </b>(involved)


<b>V. Homework:</b>



<b> -</b>Revise studied points for One-Period Test.


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 19

<b> </b>

<b>ONE-PERIODTEST</b>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson , Ss will be able to test their knowledge for the grade.


<b>I. Knowledge: </b>Prepositions,tenses….


<b> II. Skills: </b>Writing


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

<b> I.Settement: </b> Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Handing out the papaers:</b>
<b> III.Testing:</b>


<i>I.Odd one out:(0,25point/each)</i>


1. a.goodb.afternoonc.doord.noodle
2.washedb.playedc.lookedd.laughed
3.wentb.camec.was d.played


4.Chinab.chemistryc.chocolated.check


<i>II.Choose a,b,c or d to complete the following sentences(0,5 poit/each)</i>



1. She...go and visit her parents this afternoon.
a. have tob. haves to c. has to d. had to
2. My brother isn’t strong enough...the box.


a. to liftb. lift c. lifting d. lefted
3. My mother fed the chickens...


a.herselfb. himself c. themselves d. myself
4. Alexander Graham Bell...the telephone.


a. to inventb. invention c. inventing d. invented
5. They...from Viet Nam to China to find work.
a. startedb. went c. demostrated d. emigrated


6. Alexader Graham Bell was born...March 3, 1847.
a. onb. in c. at d. during


<i>III.Supply the suitable word form(0,5 point/each)</i>


1. Hoa ( see)...a movie tonight.


2. Ba is the most (humor)...student in my class.


3. What about (travel)...by bus?


4. Water (boil)...at 1000<sub>C.</sub>


<i>IV.Find and correct the mistakes (1 point/each)</i>



1.The Earth is moving around the Sun.
A B C D
2.Let’s to visit the citadel with Ba.
A B C D


<i>V.Read the text and answer the questions:(0,5 point/each)</i>


Bristain is famous for its country cottages which were often built on the country estates of
wealthy landowners.The workers on the estates rented the cottages from the landowners
and worked on the land.Cottages were also frequently built around a village green
.Cottages have low ceilings, wooden beans and sometimes a thatched roof.In the recent
years,some cottages have become second home, bought by professionals during the
economic boom of the 1980s.


* <i>Questions</i>:


1.what’s Bristain famous for?


...


2.Did the workers rented the cottages?


...


3.What did the rent the cottages for?


...


4.Who bought the cottages?



...


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 20 <b> </b>

<b>TEST-CORRECTION</b>


<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to be corrected their testing papers.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>: Tested points


<b> II. Skills: </b>Speaking


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

<b>I.Settlement:</b> Greeting and checking the attendance


<b>II.15-minute Test:</b> * <i>Choose a,b,c or d to complete the following sentences</i>:
1.The Sun…..in the East and….in the West.


a.rise/setb.rises/setc.rises/setsd.is rising/is setting
2.My fahter used to……..cigarettes.


a.smoke b. to smoke c.smoking d.smoked
3.She……T.V onece a week.


a.is going to watch b.is watching c.watches d.watched
4.Little Pea had to do….all day.


a. chores b. homeworks c.experiments d. excercises
5.Were you in class 7A last year?.



a.Yes,I did. b.Yes,I were. c.Yes, I was. d.No, we were.
6.Our team played well…..to win the match.


a. so b. that c. too d. enough
7.We must be there ……7.30 and 8.15.


a. at b. before c. between d. after
8.At last Romeo and Juliet killed….


a. yourselves b. ourselves c. themselves d. them
9.Mary was born in Vietnam.Vietnamese is her….


a. first language b. mother language c.mother toungue d. foreign language
10. She asked her children……..to bed.


a. to go b. go c. went d. going


*Answer: <i>1.c 2.a 3.c 4.c 5.c 6.d 7.c 8.c 9.c </i>
<i>10.a</i>


<b>III.Handing out the papers and correcting the test</b>:


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<i>I.Odd one out :</i>


T. runs through and elicit the answers for
the questions and reasons for the



choices,then gives the feedback.
1. c-door 3. played
2. b-played 4. b-chemistry


<i>II.Choose a,b,c or d to complete the </i>
<i>following sentences:</i>


T. runs through and elicit the answers for
the questions and reasons for the


choices,then gives the feedback.
1. c-has to 4. invented
2. a-to lift 5. emigrated
3. a-herself 6. a-on


<i>III.Supply the correct forms of the words:</i>


T. runs through and elicit the answers for
the word form and reasons for the


choices,then gives the feedback.
1. is going to see <i>( tonight)</i>


2.homorous <i>( superative of the adjectives)</i>


3..traveling <i>(what about+Ving)</i>


4. boils <i>(for general truth)</i>
<i>IV. Find and correct the mistakes:</i>



1. B – moves 2. B – visit


<i>V. Read the text and answer the questions:</i>


T. runs through and elicit the answers for


Ss read the questions and then give the
answers and the reasons for their choices.


Ss read the questions and then give the
answers and the reasons for their choices.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
the questions and reasons for the


choices,then gives the feedback.
1. Bristain is famous for its country
cottages.


2.Yes,they did.


3. They rented the cottages for working on
them.


4. Professionals bought the cottages.


Ss read the text again and then answer the
questions again ind.,then in pairs and in
groups.



<b>IV. Mark reporting: </b>


* T.asks Ss to read their marks again and Ss report into the mark-book.


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Revise the studied points.
- Prepare Unit 4: Our Past


<i>(section Getting started, Listen and Read- P.38-39)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 21<b> </b>

<b>Unit 4</b>

<b>:</b>

<b>OUR PAST</b>



<i> Lesson 1:Getting started - Listen and Read</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the past habits which are now
finished.


<b> I. Knowledge:</b>Used to


<b> II. Skills:</b>Speaking and writing


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>



<b> I. Settlement: </b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Revision/Braistorming: </b><i>electricity</i>


<i>mobilphone</i>


<i><b> Things we have now</b></i>


<i><b> television telephone</b></i>


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1.Presentation:</b>
<b>* Preteach:</b>


T uses techniques to elicit each word
T reads each word 3 times


T writes on board and asks Ss the meanings and
the mark stress


(to)look after (v) (synonym):
(to) lit the lamp (v) (mime):
equipment (n) (picture):
folktale (n) (example):
traditional (a)(antonym):
*Check vocab: What and Where



<i>look after lit the lamp </i>






Listen and repeat in choral, in
groups, in individially


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<i> equipment folktale traditional</i>


<b>* Presentation dialogue:</b>


T.asks Ss to listen to the tape or T. reads the
dialogue then has Ss practice the dialogue in
pairs.


T. uses the dialogue to set the scene


<b>*</b><i>Model sentences</i>


I used to look after my younger brother and
sisters.


She used to cook the meals.


*<i>Form</i>: S + Used to + Vinf + O : thường



<i>( the past habits not relate to the present)</i>


<b>3.Practice:</b> Word cue drill


<i>a.Vietnamese farmers / live / small / cottages</i>
<i>b.Vietnamese children / stay at home.</i>


<i>c.Vietnamese women / work / hard.</i>


Ex: Our grandmother used to tell stories.
T. asks Ss to use the given cues to make
entences using <i>used to + Vinf</i>


* <i>Comprehension questions: P 39</i>


T.asks Ss to read the text again and answer the
questions in pairs.


* <i>Answer:</i>


a. Nga’s grandmother uesd to live on a farm
b. Because she had to stay at home and help


her mom.


c. She used to cook meals, clean…..


d. After dinner, mom lit the lamp and Dad
used to tell stories.



<b>4.Further Practice:</b>


T. asks Ss to do Task 3 page 39.
T. runs through and models.


T.asks Ss to check the statements fact or
opinion.


<b>* </b><i>Answer: </i>a-F; b-F; c-F; d -F; e-O; f-O


Ss work in groups to play this game


Listen and practice the dialogue


- Copy the form
S + used to + V-inf


Ss work ind.en in pairs and in groups to
make sentences with “used to”


<i>*Answer:</i>


a.Vietnamese farmers used to live in
small cottages


b.Vietnamese children used to stay at
home.


c.Vietnamese women used to work
hard.



Ss work in open-closed pairs.


Ss work ind.,then share in pairs and in
groups.


<b>IV. Consolidation:</b>T.asks Ss to write 5 activities they used to do when they were children.
*<i>Example</i>: I used to get up late.


<b>V. Home work:</b>


- Complete the 5 activities with “I used to ... “into the notebook.
- Memorize vocab.


- Read the text and answer the questions.


-Prepare Unit 4 : Our Past – section <i>Speak and Listen P.40-41</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period :22<b> </b>

<b>Unit 4: OUR PAST</b>



<i> Lesson 2:Speak and Listen P.40-41</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES:</b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the differences
between life in the past and at present.


<b>I. Knowledge:</b>Simple Past and Simple Present



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b>I. Settlement: </b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b>II.Revision:*</b><i>Noughts and Crosses</i>


<i>Live on a farm</i> <i>Cook meals</i> <i>Stay at home and help Mom</i>


<i>Do everything by hands</i> <i>Look after children</i> <i>Wash clothes by hands</i>


<i>Clean the house</i> <i>Listen to stories</i> <i>Lit the lamp</i>


* T. ssks Ss to make sentences, using “used to”in two groups.


<b>III. New lesson</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Pre </b>–<b> Speaking:</b>


T. elicts vocabulary using the pictures.


T. models the first.


Ex:People used to live in thatched
cottages.Now people in large houses or
buildings.


<b>2. While </b>–<b> Speaking:</b>



<i>Activity1</i>:


T. asks Ss to make some sentences about the
differences beetwen the life in the past and the
one at present ind.,in pairs and in groups.


* <i>Possible Answers:</i>


-People used to travel on foot.Now they travel
by car,motorbike or bike….


-People used to work hard all the time.Now
they have more time for entertainment.


-There is no electricity.Now there is in almost
everywhere.


………


<i>Activity 2</i>:


T.asks Ss to talk about the things they used to do
last year ind and then share in pairs and in


groups and then the feedback.


<b>3. Post - speaking : </b>* Listening


T. asks Ss to listen to the story and write the


letter of the most suitable moral lesson ind.,
then in pairs and in groups.


Ss brainstorm all the verbs about the
differences between life in the past and
life in the present


Ss make some sentences with “used
to ...” in individidually.


Ss work in groups to write down


sentences with “used to / didn’t use to +
V inf”


Ss work in individidually and read
alound the answers.


Ex a. In the past they used to swim in
the river but now they swim in the
swimming pool.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
*Answer:


“<i> Don t be foolish and greedy</i>’ ”


-Ss listen and write the letter of the
most suitable moral lesson.



<b>IV.Consolidation:</b>(Involved)


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Revise to be talking about the differences between life used and the one at present.
- Prepare Unit 4 – section : Read P. 41- 42


<i>(The story The Lost Shoe and its moral lesson)</i>“


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date<b>:</b>


Period :23 <b> </b>

<b>Unit 4: OUR PAST</b>



<i><b> </b></i>

<i>Lesson 3:Read P.41-42</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to undestand the main and details ideas of the
text.


<b>I. Knowledge:</b>Simple past


<b>II. Skills:</b>Reading and writing


<b>B. PROCEDURE</b>


<b>I. Settlement: </b>Greeting and check the attendance.



<b>II. Checking:*</b><i>Pelmanism </i>




<b>III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Pre </b>–<b> reading:</b>


* Pre – teach:


T uses techniques to elicit each word
T reads each word 3 times


T writes on board and asks Ss the meanings and
the mark stress


do chores (v)( picture):
harvest festival (n)(picture):
fairy (n) (example):


rags (n) (realia):
- Check vocab: R.O.R


<i>* Pre </i>–<i> questions:</i>


T.asks some to questions to leadin the story.


<i>a. Do you know the story. The lost Shoe What </i>“ ”



- Ss listen to T’s and repeat in choral
ingroups, ind..


- Copy down


Make <i>Come</i> <i>Hold</i> <i>Run</i> <i>Lose</i> <i>Find</i> <i>Fall</i>
<i>Make</i>


<i>Made</i> <i>Came</i> <i>Held</i> <i>Run</i> <i>Lost</i> <i>Foun</i>


<i>d</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<i>can you guess from the title ?</i>


<i>b. Who was little Pea ? Who was Stout Nut ?</i>
<i>c. Whose shoe was lost ?</i>


<b>2. While </b>–<b> Reading:</b>


<i>*Activity 1:</i>


T. asks Ss to read the text and find out the
answers for the pre-questions.


T.asks Ss to guess the meaning from the content
cruel <i>phải lòng ai</i>



upset <i>buồnchán</i>


broken heart <i>độcác</i>


magically <i>kỳ</i> <i>diệu</i>


fall in love <i>đautim</i>
<i>*Activity 2:</i>Gap-fill (P42 - text book)


T. asks Ss to read the story agin and complete
the sentences given.ind.,then share in pairs and
in groups.


*Answer:


<i>a .farmer b. died c. used....again </i>
<i> d. marry e . new clothes f. lost</i>


T.asks Ss to work in pairs for asking and
answering the questions (Text book -P.42)
Answer


a.She was a poor farmer’s daughter.
b.She made litter Pea do the chores


c.Before the festival starter, a fair appeared and
magically changed her rags into beautiful
clother.


d.The prince decided to marry the girl who fitted


the lost shoe.


<b>3.Post </b>–<b> Reading:</b>


T.asks Ss to retell story in their own words.


Ss answer teacher’s questions.
a. May be some one lost Shoe
Litter Pea lost shoe.


Ss read the text to find out the
answers.


Ss read the text and match the English
with suitable translation.


Ss read the text to fill in gaps
individually and then in pairs,answer
questions.


Ss work ind. and retell the story.


<b>IV.Consolidation:</b><i>* The moral lesson impliciting in the text?</i>


<b>V.Home work:</b>


- Read the story for details and answer the questions.
- Memorize vocab.


- Retell the story.



- Prepare Unit 4: Our Past-section Write/P.42-43
<i>( Writing a story)</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

---Date:


Period : 24 <b> </b>

<b>Unit 4: </b>

<b>OUR PAST</b>



<i> Lesson 4:Write P.43 </i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write a story.


<b> I. Knowledge:</b>Simple past


<b> II. Skills:</b>Writing and speaking


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I. Settlement: </b> Greeting and check the attendance.


<b> II.Checking: </b>Read the text and answer the questions?


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
1. Pre - writing


* Pre – teach:



stripe (n) (visual aid)
straw (n) (realia)


master (n) (explanation)
servant (n) (antonym)
wisdom (n) (translation)
(to) tie (mime)


(to) escape (trans, stnoym)
- Check vocab: What and Where


T.runs through the open story and the asks Ss
to complete with given verbs in the box.
*Ắnẻ:


1. appeared 2. was 3. said
4. left 5. went 6. tied


7. lit 8. burned 9. escaped
T.asks Ss to answer some questions
a. Where was the man ?


b. What did the tiger want to know ?
c. Did the farmer die of the fire ?
T.asks Ss to read the completed story.


<b>2. While </b>–<b> writing:</b>


T.asks Ss to inmagine they are the man to write


the story using the given words.


T.models first.


Ex:<i>One day as I was in the field and my buffalo</i>
<i>was grazing nearby.</i>


<i>* Possible story:</i>


<i>One day as I was in the field and my buffalo</i>
<i>was grazing nearby,a tiger came.It asked why</i>


Ss answer and repeat in choral
ingroups, ind..


- Copy down


Ss work ind. to complete story by using
the verbs in the box ind.,then share in
pairs and in groups.


Ss answer some questions.
a. He was in the field


b. The tiger wanted: why the strong
buffalo was a servant


c. No, he didn’t


- Write the story (change he into I) ind.


--> in groups


Copy down


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<i>the strong buffalo was my servant</i>


<b>3.Post - writing: </b>*Exhibition


T.asks Ss to stick or write the sory on the board
and elicit the mistake an d then ask Ss to
correct for each other.


<b>IV.Consolidation: *</b>Retell the story


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Complete the story into the notebook.
- Prepare section <i>Language focus</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date<b>:</b>


Period : 25<b> </b>

Unit 4

<b>: OUR PAST</b>



<i> Lesson 5 : Langguage focus P44-45</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES</b>



By the end of this lesson students will be able to recall some irregular verbs in the simple
past..


<b>I. Knowledge:</b>- irregular verbs


<b>- </b>used to + verb (bare inf)


- prepositions of time: in, on, before, between


<b>II. Skills:</b>Speaking and writing


<b>B. PROCEDURE</b>
<b>I. Settlement</b>


<b>II. Checking:</b>*Pelmanism


* T asks Ss to work in 2 teams.


<b>III. New lesson</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1.Simple Past:</b>


T.asks Ss to write the past simple form of
each verbs


Keys:



b. flew c. took d.
went e. had 2.
T.asks Ss to complete the dialogue using the
simple past of the verbs above ind.,then in
pairs and in groups.


*Possiple keys:
a. Did you eat rice ?


b. I went to school by bus ?


- Work ind. to write the past simple of each
verbs.


- Copy down


Ss work in pairs to complete the dialogue.
Then practice the dialogue in pairs.


<b>go</b> <i><b>mak</b></i>
<i><b>e</b></i>


<i><b>buy</b></i> <i><b><sub>get</sub></b></i>
<i><b>bring</b></i>


<i><b>mad</b></i>
<i><b>e</b></i>
<i><b>wen</b></i>


<i><b>t</b></i> <i><b>bought</b></i> <i><b>got</b></i>


<i><b>brough</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
c. Where were you last night ?


d. I had English.


<b>2.Prepositions of Time:</b>


T.ssks Ss to look at the table and then
complete the sentences with suitable
prepositions ind.,then in pairs and in
groups..


Keys: a, on b, in c, between
d, at - after e, before


- Gives the way to use some prepositions
in + year (in 1976)
in + month (in August)
on + date (on 16)
on + date, month, year (on June.2,2004)
on + day (on Monday)
at + time (at 7 am)


<b>3.Used to+ Vinf:</b>


T. asks Ss to recall the way to use “Used to”


<i>Form</i>: S + used to + V-inf


S + didn’t use to + V-inf
Did + S + use to + V-inf ?


T. asks Ss to complete the dialogue with


<i>used to</i> and suitable given verbs in pairs.
Keys: 1, used to have


2, used to be
3, used to live


- Work ind. to use the prepositions to
complete the sents


- Listen and copy down


SS make example sentences.
I used to cry when I was 2 years
I didn’t use to eat candy


Did you eat candy ?


Ss look at the pictures to complete the
dialogue using “used to” and verbs in box
ind.,and then in pairs


Ss work in pairs and practice the dialogue.


<b>IV.Consolidation: </b><i>(involved)</i>



<b>V.Homework:</b>


<b> </b>- Revise all revised points.


- Prepare Unit 5 : Study Habits – Section Getting started+ Listen and read P. 46


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 26<b> </b>

Unit 5

<b>: STUDY HABITS</b>



<i> Lesson 1:Getting started - Listen and Read P. 46-47</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about study habit, giving instructions and
advice.


<b>I. Knowledge: </b>Commands, requests, and advice in reported speech


<b>II. Skills:</b> Listening,Speaking and reading


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

<b>I. Settlement: </b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b>II.Revision:</b>


* T asks Ss to match adjectives with suitable adverbs.


<b>III. New lesson</b>



<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
1. <b>Presentation</b>


a.Pre-teach


to improve <i>(translation)</i>


to promise <i>(explain)</i>


to try one’s best <i>(translation)</i>


pronunciation <i>(mine)</i>


a report card <i>(picture)</i>


to be proud of <i>(synonym)</i>


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and
in chorus ,then T.reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


*Check vocab: R.O.R
b.Presentation dialogue:


T. asks Ss to listen to the dialogue.
Activity 1:T.asks Ss to do Task 2 (P.47)


Keys: a. F, b. T, c. F,
d. T, e. F, f. T


T.asks to do Task 3 (P.47)in pairs.
* Answer:


a.She is Tim’s Spainish teacher.


b.Miss Jackson gave Tim’s mother a report
card.


d.He did well at school.


d.She said Tim should workh harder on his
Spainish pronunviation.


e.Miss Jackson gave Tim’s mother a
dictionary.


<i>* Model sentence</i>


Miss Jackson said you should work harder.


<b>2. Practice: </b> Language Focus 4 P. 53
T. asks Ss to report Miss Jackson’s advice
she gave in her conversation with Tim’s
mother.


<i> *Example Exchange:</i>


S1: Miss Jackson said you should work


Listen and repeat in choral in groups,


ind.


Copy down


Ss naswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to T’s
model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then answer
about the stress – meaning and copy into
the notebook.


- Listen and practice the dialogue


- Read dialogue a gain and do task 2 (P.47)
T/F


Ss answer the questions ind., then in pairs
and in groups.


Ss listen and copy down the forminto the
notebook.


S + said + S + Should + Vbare - inf


good bad fast hard beautifu
l
hard beautifull


y well badly fast


careful
carefull



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
harder on your spaish.


S2: Miss Jackson said you should practice
speaking spanish everyday.


<b>3. Further Practice:</b>Word cue drill*
a. Miss Lien / said / you / tell the truth
b. Hoa / said / you / eat / more egg


T. asks Ss to build sentences using the given
words or phrases ind.,then in pairs and in
groups.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in groups.


<b>IV. Consolidotion:</b><i>(involved)</i>


<b>V. Home work:</b>


<b> - </b>Memorize vocab and read the text and answer the questions.
- Complete Language Focus 4 into the notebook and its form.
- Prepare Unit 5: Study habits(section Speak and listen P.47- 48)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 27<b> </b>

Unit 5:

<b> STUDY HABITS</b>




<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 2: Speak and Listen P.47-48</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson ,Ss will be able to talk about their study and listen to the text for
filling the report card.


<b>I. Knowledge:</b>Giving advice


<b>II. Skills:</b> Speaking and Listening


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b>I. Settlement: </b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b>II.Revision: *</b>Netword


<i> Biography Chemistry</i>


<i> Subjects</i>




<i> Math English</i>


<b>III. New lesson</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’



<b>1. Pre </b>–<b> speaking:</b>


T.asks Ss to think of these questions in book
(They don’t have to answer them)


<b>2. While - speaking:</b>


T.asks Ss to practice speaking,using the
questions above.


* Example Exchange:


S1: When do you do your home work ?
S2: After dinner


S1: Who help you with your home work?


Ss think of these questions (P.48) ind..


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
S2: My parents


T. asks Ss to work in pairs for the rest questions.


<b>3. Post </b>–<b> Speaking: </b>Listening


T. asks Ss to listen to the tape and fill in the
report card.


T. runs through and explain some words in the


open report card.


behavior (n)
participation (n)
cooperation(n)


T. asks Ss to lisen to the tape and fill in the
report card with missing information.
* Answer:


1.Days present :87 days
2. Days absent: 5 days
3.Behavior-Partipation: S
4.Listening: C


5. Speaking : A
6. Reading: A
7. Writing : B
8. Miss Blake


using the questions above.


Ss work listen to the tape and fill in the
table ind., then share in pairs and in
groups


<b>IV. Consolidotion: </b><i>(involved)</i>


<b>V. Home work:</b>



- Revise telling about the study.


- Prepare Unit 5: Study Habits( section Read P.49-50)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 28

Unit 5:

<b>STUDY HABITS</b>



<i>Lesson 4:Read P.49- 50</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas of the
text.


<b> I. Knowledge: </b>Giving instructions and advice on how to learn.


<b> II. Skills:</b> Reading and speaking


<b>B. PROCEDURE</b>


<b> I. Settlement: </b> Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Revision:</b>Brainstorming


<i> learn 5 words How do you learn new words</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

<i> write words in a note book</i>



<b> III.New lesson</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Pre - reading</b>


Pre-Teach :


mother tongue <i>(example)</i>


(to) stick <i>(gesture)</i>


(to) come across <i> (synonym)</i>
<i> </i> (to) underline <i> (mine)</i>
<i> </i> (to) highlight <i> (mine)</i>


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to T’s
model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then answer about
the stress – meaning and copy into the
notebook.


* Check vocab: R . O . R


<i>*</i> T/F Statements Prediction<i>:</i>


a. All language learners write the meaning of
new words in their mother tongue.


b. Some learners write examples of words they


want to learn.


c. Every learner tries to learn all new words
they come across.


<b>2. While - reading </b>


Activity 1: Read and check


T. asks Ss to read the text again and check their
predictions.


* Answer:


a, F b, T c, F d, T


* Activity 2: Answer the question


T. asks Ss again and answer the questions ind.,
then in pairs.


*Answer:
a. No, they learn in diffrrent ways


b. Such sentence help them remember the use
of new words


c. Learners write examples , but the words in
their meaning ....



d. They may think they can’t do so.
e. Revision is necessary in learning.


<b>3. Post </b>–<b> reading :*</b> Discussion


T. asks Ss to choose the way of learning vocab
which he / she thinks is the most effective, he /
she can talk about the reasons for their choice.


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to
T’s model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress – meaning
and copy into the notebook.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in groups
guess the sentences are T/F.


- Listen and read ind. to check their
predictions.


- Answer these questions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

<b>IV. Consolidotion: </b><i>(involved)</i>


<b>V. Home work:</b>
<b> </b>- memorize vocab.


<b> </b>- Read the text again and ansser the questions.


- Prepare Unit 5: study habits ( section Write P.42- 43 )



<i> (How to write a letter)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 29 <b> </b>

<b> Unit 5: STUDY HABITS</b>



<i> Lesson 5: Write P.42- 43</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES:</b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write an informal letter .


<b> I. Knowledge: </b> the format of a letter


<b> II. Skills:</b>Writing


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I. Settlement: </b> Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II. Checking: </b> Read the text again and answer the questions.


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Pre </b>–<b> writing:</b>* Odering


T.cuts the letters into pieces and asks Ss to put


them in the correct oder to form a letter.Then T.
asks Ss to identify the sections of the letter.
*Answer:


B - Heading<i>(write s address and the date)</i>’
D - Opening<i> (Dear ...)</i>


A - Body of the letter


C – Closing<i>(Your friend / Regards / Love)</i>


<b>2. While </b>–<b> writing:</b>


T.runs through the given cues.
T.models.


Ex: dear Donna,


Thanks for you letter.I…..


T. asks Ss to write a letter, using the cues giver,
basing on the letter ind.


<b>3. Post </b>–<b> writing: </b> * Correction


T. asks Ss to write their letters on the board and
elicit the correction from Ss or asks Ss to
correct mistakes for each other.


* Possible Answer:


24 Ha Noi st.
Hue


June 20, 200…


Ss work ind. Then share in pairs and in
groups reading the letter again for
putting the cut sections of the letter to
form a good one.


In ind, Ss write a letter, using the cues
given.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
Dear Donna,


Thanks for your letter.I’m pleased to hear you
had an enjoyable Mother’s Day.


We received our second semester report last
month.I got good grade for Math ,Geography
and Physics,but my English and History results
were poor.My teacher asksed my to improve
my English and History.


Mid- Atumn festival will come in a few
weeks.That’s the moon festival in Viet Nam.I
think I told you about it in the last letter.I am
going to Ha Long Bay with my aunt and uncle
by bus this afternoon.I’ll send you a postcard


from there.


Write soon and tell me about your news.
Your friends,


<i>Lan</i>


Ss can copy the suggested letter into the
notebook.


<b>IV. Consolidotion: </b><i>( involved)</i>


<b>V. Homework:</b>


- Complete the letter into the notebook.
- Memorize the format of the letter.


- Prepare Unit 5 : Study habits ( Language ) for the next period.


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 30

<b>Unit 5: STUDY HABITS</b>


<i> Lesson 6 : Langguage focus P. 52- 53</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: </b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to advice some one and the
use of adv of manner.


<b> I. Knowledge:A</b>dverbs of manner and Commands, requests and advice in reported


speech.


<b> II. Skills :</b>Writing and Speaking


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>
<b> I. Settlement</b>


<b> II.Revision: * </b>Slap the board


<i> repair paint cut replant mend</i>


<b> III. New lesson</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Adverb of manner </b>


T. runs through and models. (o) well


T.asks Ss to complete the dialogue ind. ,then in
pairs and in groups.


* Answer:


1, hard 3, badly
2, fast 4, soflly
2. Should+Vinf ( For giving advice)


Ss complete the dialogue with suitable
given adverbs of manner. Then practice


the dialogue in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
T.asks Ss to look at the picture and models.


Ex:Mr hao should repair the roof.


T. asks Ss to discuss what Mr Hao should do for
his house by using the verbs given ind., then in
pairs and in groups.


<b>3.Reported Speech:</b>


T. gives the example sentence to model, and
elicits the form.


Form: S + ask (told) + Object + to + Vinf


* <i>Activity 1</i>: Task 3 P.53


T. asks Ss to do Task 3 (P.53) ind.,then in pairs
and in groups , report Miss Jackson’s


commands and requests with Tim’s mother.


<i>Activity 2 </i>Task 4 P.53


T. asks Ss to do Task 4 (P.53) ind.,then in pairs
and in groups , report Miss Jackson’s advice
with Tim’s mother.



*Answer:


a. Mr Hao should repeair the roof.
b. He should paint the hoase
c. He should cut the grass
d. He should replant the trees
e. He should mend the door.


* Answer:


a. Miss Jackson asked me to wait
outside her office


b. Miss Jackson told me to give you
your report card ...


c. Miss Jackson asked me to help you
with your spanish pro


d. Miss Jackson asked me to meet her
next week.


*Answer


a. Miss Jackson said you should spend
more time on....


b. Miss Jackson said you should
practice speaking ....



c. Miss Jackson said you should listen
to spanish conversation


<b>IV. Consolidotion: </b><i>(involved)</i>


<b>V. Home work</b>


<b> </b>- Revise adverbs of manner and Reported for giving commands,requests and advice.
- Prepare Unit 6:The Young Pioneers club ( Getting started – Listen and read / 54 –
55 )


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 31

<b>Unit 6:THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB</b>


<i> Lesson 1:Getting started - Listen and Read P. 54-55</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: </b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to complete an application
form.


<b>I. Knowledge:</b><i>Personal information.</i>


<b>II. Skills:</b> Speaking and Writing


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b>I. Settlement:</b> Greeting and check the attendance



<b>II. Checking: </b>15’- Test


<i>* Choose a,b,c or d to complete the following sentences:</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

a.likeb.likedc.likesd.to like


2.His parents are very pround…….him.
a.atb. forc.ofd.to


3.She asked her children……….to bed.
a.to go b.goesc.wentd.go


4.People used to…………the world was flat.
a.thinkb.thinksc.thoughtd.thinking


5.She advised me………late.
a.not to beb.not beingc.notd.not be


6.The children aren’t old enough to look after……….
a.themselvesb.ourselvesc.herselfd.for themselves
7.You will…….cook dinner yourself.


a.ought tob.shouldc.have to d.must
8.Would you like………a massage?
a.leavingb.to leavec.leftd.leave


9.Our friends … ………. meet me at the bus station tonight.
a.are going tob.arec.go tod.will be to


10.Deaf-mutes can…………speak……..hear.



a. both……and….. b. not only………but also…...
c. either…...or…...d. neither…… ….. nor………..


<b>III. New lesson</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
1. <b>Getting started</b>: Brainstorming


<i>Y and Y activities</i>


<i> Helping blind people</i>


T.asks Ss to work out what Y and Y do.


<b>2. Presentation:</b>


Pre-Teach


to enroll: <i> (translation)</i>


to fill out: <i>(mime)</i>


to sign: <i>(gesture)</i>


application form (n) <i>(visual aid)</i>


interest (n) <i>(translation)</i>


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in


chorus ,then T.reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


*Check vocab: slap the board
b. Presentation dialogue:
T.asks Ss to listen to the text.


<b>3. Practice:*</b>Comprehension questions:


a. What s hername?/ fullname ?



<i> b. Where does she live ?</i>


<i> c. Does she have a phone number</i>
<i> d. What s her date of birth ?</i>’


<i> e. What are her hobbies ?</i>


Ind.then in pairs and in groups,T.asks Ss to read
the text and complete Nga’s details


<b>4. Production:</b>


Ss work out the activities that the Y and
Y do with the whole class.




Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to
T’s model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then


answer about the stress – meaning
and copy into the notebook.


Ss practice speaking the dialogue in
pairs.


Ss work in two teams .


Ss work ind.,then in pairs reading the
text and answer the questions.


*<i>Answer</i> :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

T.asks Ss to complete the their details ind.


<i>Name:</i>


<i>Home address:</i>
<i>Phone </i>


<i>number:</i>
<i>Date of brith:</i>
<i>Sex:</i>


<i>Interests:</i>


e. Drawing, out door activities ...


Ss work ind to complete. Then share in
pairs and in groups.



<b>IV. Consolidotion: </b>Recall the table.


<b>V. Home work:</b>


<b> </b>- Read the text and memorize vocab and for details to answer the questions.
- Prepare Unit 6 (section prak and Listen P.55-56)


<i>(ask for favors/offer assistances )</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 32

<b>Unit 6:THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB</b>



<i> Lesson 2:Speak and Listen (P.55 - 56) </i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: </b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to ask for favors, offer
assistance,practice responding and listen to the song to fill in the missing words.


<b> I. Knowledge:</b><i>Modals: - can, could, may (asking for favors)</i>


<i> - certainly/of course/sure/no problem(responding to favors)</i>


<b> II. Skills:</b> Speaking and Writing


<b>B. PROCEDURE</b>
<b>I. Settlement</b>



<b>II. Checking: </b> Read the dailogue and answer the questions


<b>III. New lesson</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1</b>. <b>Revision</b>: Find S.O who


Find S.O who Name


<i>...enjoys drawing</i>


<i>...likes uot door activities</i>
<i>...takes part in sports</i>
<i>...loves acting</i>


<i>...participates in heiping ...</i>


*Example Exchange:
S1 : Do you like drawing?
S2: Yes, I do.


T. asks Ss to work in groups.


<b>2. Pre </b>–<b> speaking</b>:


T asks Ss questions to recall the structures
for asking for favors and offering
assistance.



Ss work in groups asking and answering the
questions filling in the table.


*Example:


<i>S1: Could you do me a favor ?</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<i>What can you say when you need a favor ?</i>


T.can summerize the structures.


<i>- Can/Could you……….?</i>


<b>3. While </b>–<b> speaking:</b>


<i>Activity 1</i>:


T. has Ss to practice the dialogue a,b P.55)
in pairs.


<i>Activity 2</i>: T. asks Ss to use the appropriate
phrases in the box ( P.55) to make a similar
dialogue about some of the situation in.
then in pairs .


<b>3. Post </b>–<b> speaking: </b>* Listening


T.notices Ss some vocab before listening.


( to) unite <i> (translation)</i>


hold hands <i>(gesture)</i>


should out <i> (mine)</i>


make a stand <i>(gesture)</i>


T.asks Ss to listen to the song and fill in the
missing information ind.,then in paris and
in groups.


* Answer:


1. united 7. of
2. peace 8. world
3. right 9.show
4. love 10. place
5. north 11. out
6. south 12. stand
13. world


<i>the police station ?</i>


S2: Yes, you go a head. It’s aposite the park
S1: Thanks, It’s very kind of you


S2: Never mind.


Ss work in pairs with the dialogue.And then


using the given phrases on page 55 to make
a similar conversation.


Ss use the appropriate phrases in the box to
make a similar dialogue in pairs.


Ss listen to the song for filling in the
missing information ind.then in pairs and in
groups.


<b>IV.Consolidation:</b> T. asks Ss to sing the song again.


<b>V.Homework:</b>


<b> - </b>Revise how to ask for favors and offer assistance.
<b>- </b> Prepare Unit 6 ( section Read P.57)


<i> ( about American Youth Organization)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 33

<b>Unit 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB</b>



<b> </b>

<i><b>Lesson 4: Read P.57</b></i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: </b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the main and
details ideas of the text.



<b> I. Knowledge:</b><i>American Youth Organization</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I. Settlement: </b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II. Checking: * </b><i>Change into the reported speech</i><b>:</b>


a.He asked me : “Could you show me the way to the post office?”


b.Mrs Kim said :”Hai should work harder on his Egnlish proununciation”
*<i>Answer</i>: a. He asked me to show him the way to the post office.


b. Mrs Kim said (that) you should work harder on your Egnlish proununciation


<b> III. New lesson</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Pre </b>–<b> Reading:</b>


a. Pre – teach:


citizenship (unc) <i>(translation)</i>


fitness (unc) <i>(translation)</i>


coeducational (adj) <i>(translation)</i>


voluntary (adj) <i>(explain)</i>



(to) encourage : <i>(translation)</i>


(to) establish : <i>(translation)</i>


businessman (n) <i> (axample)</i>


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


* Check vocab: R.O.R
b.T/F Stalements Prediction


<i>a. The Y and Y in VN is similar to the Boy scouts</i>
<i>of America.</i>


<i>b. BSA is an organization of adults.</i>
<i>c. BCA is mainly for Boys.</i>


<i>d.Scouting program in each nation is the same.</i>
<i>c. Scouting is popular world wide now.</i>


T. runs through and asks Ss to predict the
statements are true or false in 2 teams.


<b>2. While-Reading:</b>


<i>Activity 1</i>:



T. asks Ss to read the text to check their
predictions ind.,then in pairs and in groups.


* Answer: <i> a,T b,F c,T d,F e,T</i>
<i>Activity 2</i>:


T. runs through and asks Ss to the missing date
(1.P.57) ind.,then in pairs and in groups.


* Answer:


<i>a, 1907 b, 1909 c, 1910 d, 1994</i>
<i>Activity 3</i>:Comprehension questions: P.57


T. runs through and asks Ss to read the text again
and anser the questions in pairs.


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the stress
– meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Ss predict these statements are T/F
ind.,then in pairs and groups.


Ss read the text check their prediction
ind.,in pairs and in groups.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


* Answer:


<i>a, Scouting began in 1970.</i>


<i>b.The meeting between a boy an Mr William.</i>
<i>c.Girl can join in the girl guides Association and</i>
<i>camp fire Boys and gril.</i>


<i>d.The three aims are building character, good</i>
<i>citi zenship and personal fitness.</i>


<b>3. Post </b>–<b> Reading:</b>


T. asks Ss to list activities that your school’s
HCM young pioneer often does.


*Ex: Take part in mini - project


In pais,Ss read the text again and
answer the questions.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups for your HCM Young Pioneers
often does.


<b>IV. Consolidotion:</b>


*Recall the list of activities that your school’s HCM Young pioneer often does.


<b>V. Homework:</b>



<b> </b>- Read the text again and answer the questions and memorize vocab.
- Prepare Unit 6 (section <i>Write P.58 </i>)


<i> (about how to write a letter)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 34

Unit 6:

<b>THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB</b>


<i> Lesson 5:Write P.58</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write a letter about future
plan.


<b> I. Knowledge:</b>Gerunds


<b> II. Skills:</b>Writing and reading


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I. Settlement: </b>Greeting and ckeck the attendance.


<b> II. Checking: *</b>Read the paragraph and answer questions.


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’



<b>1.Revision</b>: Lucky Numbers


a.When did scouting begin in England ?


b.When was William Boyce introduced to scouting.
c. LN


d.How many scouts were these in America in 1994
e.LN


f.What are the scouting groups that girls can join ?
g.What are the three aims of the scouting program ?
2. <b>Pre </b>–<b>writing</b>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
Pre - teach


(to) recycle : <i>(example)</i>


(to) register : <i>(translation)</i>


fund (n) <i> (translation)</i>


side walk (n) <i> (visual aid)</i>


natural resource (n) <i>(example)</i>


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: R . O . R



T.asks Ss to read the notice (P58) and answer the
questions.


a. What is the Y and Y planning to do ?
b. What do all members participate ?


c. How can they save natural resources and earn
money for the organization ?


T asks Ss to fill in the gaps using the information
above.


Answer:


1- community 2- recycling
3- collect 4- send
5- recycling 6- save


7- earn 8- participating
9- planting 10- helping


<b>2. While </b>–<b> writing: </b>Task 2 ( P 59 )


T.asks Ss to read the dialogue and write Hoa’s letter to
her parents telling what she is going to go ind.,then in
pairs.


<b>3. Post - writing</b>: Correction



T.asks Ss to swap writing their writing and correct
each other.And T’s gives the feedback.


<i>Dear Mom and Dad,</i>


<i>I m very happy tell you that I m going to join the Y </i>’ ’ <i><b></b></i>


<i>Y Gr is holding the Green Group of my school.</i>


<i>The Green Group is holding an environmental month</i>
<i>plan. We are going to clean the blanks of the lakes on</i>
<i>weekends.We are going to plant trees and flowers in</i>
<i>the school garden and water them every afternoon</i>
<i>after class.We are planting yuong trees and plants to</i>
<i>sell to other schools.</i>


<i>We hope that we can give more green color to the city</i>
<i>and earn some money for our school Y<b></b>Y.</i>


<i>The program is very interesting and usefull,isn t it?</i>’


<i>I will tell you more about the group activities later.</i>
<i>Love,</i>


<i>Hoa</i>


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat
ind.-in chorus,then answer about the
stress - meaning and copy into


the notebook.


Ss read the notice to answer the
questions ind.


a. Y and Y is planning to help
the community


b. They participate in a recycling
program


c. They collect used glass, papers
and cans then send them for
recycling.


Ss work ind.then in pairs and in
groups for filling in with the
words from the notice to
complete the letter.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups writing Hoa’s letter to her
parents.


Ss swap their writing and correct
each other.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

<b>IV.Consolidotion: </b> ( Involved)


<b>V.Home work:</b>



<b> - </b>Complete the letter into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 6 ( section Language Focus P. 59-62)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period :35

<b>Unit 6:THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB</b>


<i> Lesson 6:Language focus P59-62</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to revise some studied
knoledge.


<b> I. Knowledge: </b>Present tense with fure meaning,gerunds, modal verbs.


<b> II. Skills:</b>Speaking and writing


<b>B. PROCEDURE</b>


<b> I. Settlement: </b>Greeting and check the attendence


<b> II. Checking:</b>
<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Simple Tense with future meaning:</b>



T.asks Ss to look at the “Y and Y Organization
Spring Activity Program” and runs through.
T. asks Ss to ask and and answer about the
activities in pairs.


* Example Exchange:


<i>S1: When do the collect and empty the gabage?</i>
<i>S2:On January 9.</i>


<i>S1: ………</i>


2.<b>Gerunds</b>:


Activity 1:T. asks Ss to look at table and talk Ba
and Lan’s hobbies with the given “love,like,...”
and gerunds ind and then share in pairs and in
groups.


* Example Exchange:


<i>Ba loves camping but he doesn t like </i>’


<i>gardening.</i>


<i>Ba doesn t like washing up and he doesn t like </i>’ ’


<i>gardening, either.</i>


Answer:



<i>-Ba likes gatheringbroken glasses and watching</i>
<i>T.V.</i>


<i>-Ba loves camping but he hates playing </i>
<i>badminton.</i>


<i>-Lan doesn t like playing soccer or washing </i>’


<i>up.</i>


<i>-Lan likes cooking meals and performing </i>
<i>music.</i>


Ss work in pairs asking and answering
the questions about the program.


Ss look at the table work in ind.,then in
pairs to tell Ba and Lan’s hobbies


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<i>-Lan doesn t like gardening but she likes </i>’


<i>gatheringbroken glasses.</i>


<i>-Lan loves watching T.V and she likes </i>
<i>gardening.</i>


<i>-Lan likes camping but she doesn t like playing </i>’



<i>babminton.</i>


Activity 2:


The same as activity 1,T asks Ss to talk about
their own real hobbies in pairs or in groups.


* Example Exchange:


<i>S1: Do you like watching T.V?</i>
<i>S2: No.I dislike it.What about you?</i>
<i>S1:Yes.i like watching T.V.</i>


<b>3. Asking for favor</b>:


T asks Ss to complete the dialogue by using the
expressions in the box to ask for a favor and
then practice the diaolgues with a partner.


Answer


<i>A. buy a ticket</i>


<i>B. take me cross the road</i>
<i>C. help me with math</i>


<i>D. water the flowers in the garden.</i>


T. asks Ss to use useful expressions in the boxes


on page 55 to complete the dialogue.


Answer


<i>A: Can I help you ?</i>
<i>Do you need any help ?</i>
<i>Let me help you </i>


<i>That s very kind of you</i>’


Ss work ind.,then in pairs.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs completing
the dialogue.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs completing
the dialogue using the expreesions in
the box and work in pairs for the
complete dialogeus.


<b>IV. Consolidotion: </b> (involved)


<b>V. Home work:</b>


- Revise all the studied knowledge for the Consolidation/Revision class.
(<i>Tenses,Reported speech,Used to + V-inf...)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:



Period : 36 <b> </b>

<b> CONSOLIDATION</b>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to revisesome knoledge the
they have learnt from U4 to U6.


<b> I. Knowledge:</b><i> Tenses,Reported speech,Used to + V-inf...</i>


<b> II. Skills:</b>Speaking and writing


<b>B. PROCEDURE</b>


<b> I. Settlement: </b> Greeting and check the attendance


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

b.Mrs Kim said :”Hai should work harder on his Egnlish proununciation”
*<i>Answer</i>: a. He asked me to give him the paper.


b. Mrs Kim said (that) you should work harder on your Egnlish proununciation


<b> </b>


<b>III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Warm-up: </b>Palmanism


go tie take mend


went tied took mened



<b>1.Verb-form:</b>


* Put the verbs into correct form:
a. Last night I (watch)…….TV.
b. She (buy)………. a car last year.


c.My father uesd to(stay)…….up late for
work.


d.When Lan was a little girl, she (use)……
play football.


e.My sister likes(cook)……..meals.
f.Mr Tam asked me(go)……..out .


T. runs through and asks Ss to revise the forms
of the studied tenses and then asks Ss to work
ind.,then in pairs for putting the verbs into
suitable form.


Answer:


a.watched d.used to play
b.bought e.cooking
c.used to stay f.to go


<b>2.Reported Speech:</b>


a. He told me:“ Can you give Hoa this book ?”


b, He asked me “Please repair my watch”
c.The doctor advised me:”You should get up
early”


d.Mr Kim asked me:”Is it your pen?”


e.Mr Kim asked me:”How far is it from HH to
HC?”


f.He told his son:” Go to bed”
Answer:


a. He told me to give you that book.
b. He asked me to repair his watch.


c.The doctor advised me that I should get up
early.


* S + V - ed
I ran home


She went to the market
* Used to + V bare - inf


to tell an action which happened in the
fast and finish now.


I used to cry when I was 2 years old.


- You should ....



- Copy the form and give example.
I ask her to give me a pen


She told me to keep this story.


Could you help me...
Could you do me a favor ?
May I help you ?


Do you need any help ?
Let me help you


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
d.Mr Kim asked me if it was my pen.


e.Mr Kim asked me how far it was from HH to
HC.


f.He told his son to go to bed. Miss Lan asked...<sub>Miss Tan told me ....</sub>


- Work ind.


<b>IV. Consolidotion: </b>(involved)


<b>V. Home work:</b>


-Revise for One-period test


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>



---Date:


Period : 37

<b>ONE </b>

<b> PERIOD TEST</b>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: </b>By the end of this lesson ,Ss will be tested some studied knowledge
for grade and for the suitable teaching approach the next time as well.


<b> I. Knowledge:</b><i> Tenses,Verb forms,Reported speech,Used to + V-inf...</i><b> </b>
<b> II. Skills:</b>Writing


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I. Settlement:</b> Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Handing out the papers:</b>
<b> III.Test doing:</b>


I. Odd one out: <i>(0.25 p/each)</i>


1.a.socketb.proplemc.computerd.document
2.a.requited b.openedc.pluggedd.worked
3.a.south b.boughtc.foundd.about


4.a.they b.thinkc.thisd.there


II.Choose a,b,c or d complete the following sentences:<i>(0.5 p/each)</i>


1.Ba doesn’t like……..up.



a.washb.washesc.washedd.washing


2.Yesterday night, we………….him on T.V.
a.seeb.is seeingc.will seed.saw


3.Mr Tam should…….the roof of the house.
a.repairb.repairsc.to repaird.repairing


4.The doctor advised him……….smoking.
a.to stopb.stopc.stoppingd.stopped


5.Thu……….a small birthday party this weekend.
a.hasb.hadc.haved.is having


6.I woke up…………three o’clock…….the morning.
a. at/atb. at/onc.at/ind. in/in


III.Supply the suitable form of the words:<i>(0.5 p/each)</i>


1.Miss Hoa told his children(go)………to bed early.
2.We(see)………at the airport tonight.


3.Look! It (rain)………outside.
4.Children play very(happy) .…….in.the school yard.
IV.Change into reported speech:<i>(0.5 p/each)</i>


1.Mai told me: “ Give me a hand,pleace”


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

2.He asked me : “ How often do you go to the movies? ”



-……… ………. .
3.Miss Jackson said to Tim: “You should worh harder on your Spainish pronunciation ”


-……… ………. .


4.She told her students : ” Do the test again,please”


-……… ………. .


IV.Read and decide the stetaments true(T) or false(F):<i>(0.5 p/each)</i>


Once a farmer lived on a comfortable life with his family.His chickens laid many eggs
which the farmer used to buy food and clothing for his family.One day, he went to collect
the eggs and he discovered one of his chickens laid a gold egg. He shouted excitedly to
his wife, ”We’re rich!We’re rich!”. His wife ran to him and they both looked at the the
eggs in amazement.The wife wanted more, so her husband decided to cut open all the
chickens and find more gold eggs.Unfortunately, he couldn’t find any eggs. When
finished, all the chickens were dead.There were no more eggs of any kind for the foolish
farmers and his greed wife.


1. A farmer lived on a comfortable life with his family.


2. The farmer discovered his chickens were dead when he went to collect the eggs.
3. He couldn’t find out any more golden eggs.


4. Don’t be foolish and greedy.


<b>IV.Handing in the papers:</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>



-Revise all the tested points for the Test-correction period.


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 38

<b>TEST- CORRECTION</b>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson,Ss will be able to be corrected their testing paper for
consolidation the studied knowledge and for testing experiences as well.


<b> I Knowledge:</b> Tested knowledge


<b> II.Skills:</b> Speaking and writing


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement:</b> Greeting and check the attendances


<b> II.15-mintu test:</b>


<i>* Choose a,b,c or d to complete the following sentences:</i>


1.She said she………..learning English .
a.likeb.likedc.likesd.to like


2.His parents are very pround…….him.
a.atb. forc.ofd.to



3.She asked her children……….to bed.
a.to go b.goesc.wentd.go


4.People used to…………the world was flat.
a.thinkb.thinksc.thoughtd.thinking


5.She advised me………late.
a.not to beb.not beingc.notd.not be


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

a.ought tob.shouldc.have to d.must
8.Would you like………a massage?
a.leavingb.to leavec.leftd.leave


9.Our friends … ………. meet me at the bus station tonight.
a.are going tob.arec.go tod.will be to


10.Deaf-mutes can…………speak……..hear.


a. both……and….. b. not only………but also…...
c. either…...or…...d. neither…… ….. nor………..


<b> III.Handing out the papers and correcting the test:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
I.Odd one out:


1– c 2 – a 3 – a 4
-–b



II.Choose a,b,c or d complete the following
sentences:


1 – d (washing) <i>like+gerund</i>


2 – d ( saw ) <i>yesterday night</i>


3 – a ( repair) <i> should+Vinf</i>


4 – a (to stop) <i>advise + to V</i>


5 – d (is having)<i> present tense with future </i>
<i>meaning</i>


6 – c ( at/in)


III.Supply the suitable form of the words:
1. to go ( tell+ to V)


2.is seeing/is going to see/will see (tonight)
3.is raining (Look!)


4.happily(adverbs modify tae ordinary verbs)
IV.Change into reported speech:


1.Mai told me to give her a hand.


2.He asked me how often I went the movies.
3.Miss Jackson said to Tim he work harder on
his Spainish ponunciation



4.She told her students to do the test again.
V.True(T) or False (F):


1-T(<i>A farmer lived on a comfortable life with </i>
<i>his family)</i>


2-F<i>(He discovered one of his chickens laid a </i>
<i>gold egg.)</i>


3-T<i>(Unfortunately, couldn t find any eggs.)</i>’
4-T<i>(There were no more eggs of any kind for</i>
<i>the foolish farmers and his greed wife.)</i>


Ss read the given words and then give
the answers and the reasons for their
choices.


Ss read the questions and then give the
answers and the reasons for their
choices.


Ss read the questions and then supply
the correct form of the verbs and the
reasons for their choices ind ,then in
pairs and in groups.


Ss read the passage and then work ind
and then in pairs and in groups



deciding the staements are true or false
and quote suitable sentences for their
choices.


<b>IV.Mark reporting: </b>T.updates the mark into the mark-book.


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Revise all studied kwnoledge.


- Prepare Unit 7 : My neighborhood ( section Getting started-Listen and Read)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

Preiod : 39

<b>Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD</b>


<i>Lesson 1:Getting started - Listen and Read</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES:</b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about one’s
neighborhood.


<b> I. Knowledge:</b>neighborhood vocab


<b> II. Skills:</b>Speaking and writing


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I. Settlement: </b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II. Checking:(</b>No check)



<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1.Revision</b>: Matching and guessing game
T asks Ss to match the name of places with the
pictures.


T.chooses one of the pictures they have
mentioned and make questions for Ss.


<i>There is a ... in my neighborhood.</i>
<i> Is there a ...?</i>


<b>2. Presentation</b>


Pre-teach:


wet market (n) (picture)
pancake (n (picture)
tasty (adj) = delicious (adj) (translation)
(to) serve : (translation)
(to) see - seen (translation)
(to) be - been (translation)
T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab: R . O . R
Presentation Dialogue:


T.asks Ss to listen to the tape.


Check the comprehensions questions


T. asks Ss to read and complete the sentences in
Task 2 P.64 (texbook)


Answer key:


a.new b.last week c. tired
d.restaurant e. Hue f.pancakes


Model Sentences


We have been here since last week.
We have lived here for about 10 years.
Present Perfect Tense


Form: S + have / has + V3/V-ed + O


Ss work ind. answering T’s questions.


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to
T’s model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress – meaning
and copy into the notebook.


Ss practice the dialogue with their
partners.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
(talking about the past actions but relate to the


present)


<b>3</b>. <b>Practice</b>: Word Cue Drill


(use present perfect tense with since / for)
a. The Robinson’s / live / HN / 2001
b. They / be / on / holiday / last week
c. They / be / Nha Trang / 3days
d. They / be / Hue / 3days, (yesterday)
Example:


a.The Robinson’s have lived in HN since 2001.
T.asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups to practice the present perfect tense with
the cues.


<b>4. Production: </b>Language Focus 3 P. 69
Keys:


a. have lived b. haven’t eaten
c. have not seen d. have atteded
e. has worked f. has collected


Ss work ind.,then share in pairs and in
groups.


Ss work ind.-in pairs and in groups.



<b>IV. Consolidotion:</b> (involved in the LF 3)


<b>V. Home work</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Read the text for details.


- Revise the present perfect tense.


- Prepare Unit 7: My Neighborhood (section Speak and Listen)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date<b>:</b>


Period : 40

<b>Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD</b>


<i> Lesson 2:Speak and Listen P.64-66</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about sending a letter a parcel by airmail
or surface mail at the post office and listen to the advertisment and fill in the missing
words in it and listen to the advertisement as well .


<b> I. Knowledge: </b>Adjectives: like (not as) ... as, not (the same) ... as different from
<b>II. Skills:</b> Speaking,listening and writing


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>



<b> I. Settlement: </b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II. Checking:</b> Present Perfect Tense


I / see / her / last week <i>(I have seen her since last week)</i>


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

My neighborhood


Post office


<b>2. Pre - Speaking</b>


Pre-Teach


parcel (n) (realia)
air mail (n) (example)
surface mail (n) (example)
exhibition (n) (picture)
(to) kick off (gesture)
fan (n) (example)
photo(graph) (n) (realia)


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: Matching



Presentation Dialogue: P. 64-65 (text book)


T.asks Ss to listen to the dialogue betweenthe clerk
and Mrs Kim.


Comprehension Questions:


a. What does Mrs Kim want to do ?


<i>(to send a parcel)</i>


b. How much is airmail ? <i>(32.500 VND)</i>


c. Which is cheaper airmail or surface mail ?


<i>(surface mail)</i>


d. Does Mrs Kim send the parcel airmail ? Why ?


<i>(No, She doesn t. Because it s expensive)</i>’ ’


<b>3. While - Speaking</b>


* Mapped dialogue


Clerk You


Can /help /you ? ----> want / send / this
... to ...



You / want / send / air
mail / surface


mail ? ---> surface mail /
I weigh / It / 20 /


gram / 800 dong ---> Here / you
please / how...


Thank you ----> you / welcome


T. runs through – elicits the questions and the
answers.Then models- pairwork.


<b>4. Post </b>–<b> Listening: </b> Listening


Ind.,then share in pairs and in groups;T.asks Ss to
listen and fill in missing information in each of the
advertise.


Keys:


Ss work ind. filling in the nets.


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the stress
– meaning and copy into the
notebook.



Ss listen to the text and practice
dialogue in pairs.


In pairs,Ss answer the questions.


Ss look at the board for the given
cues.


Ss answer-listen to T. And then work
in open-closed pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

2. Town Group


3. Speaking Contest
4. Culture House


advertisement ind.,then share in
pairs and in groups.


<b>IV. Consolidation:</b> T.asks Ss to write the advertisement: “What’s on this week?”*
Ex: There’s The New Comer on at…..


<b>V. Home work:</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Revise talking about sending a letter or a parcel at the post office.
<b>- </b>Prepare Unit 7: section Read for the next class.



<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 41

<b>Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD</b>



<i>Lesson 3: Read P. 67- 68</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES:</b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to read a text to understand
the main ideas and details.


<b> I. Knowledge: </b>The present perfect tense with “Since” and“For”


<b> II. Skills:</b> Reading and Speaking


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I. Settlement: </b> greeting and check the attendance


<b> II. Checking: </b>(No checking)


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Pre </b>–<b> reading:</b>


Pre-Teach:


shopping mall (n) (picture)


roof (n) (picture)


convenient (adj) (synonym) useful
air – conditioned(adj) (translation)
Product (n) (example)
discount (n) (explanation)
notice (n) (sunonym)


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: What and Where


roof convenient


product notice
True/False Prediction:


a. The mall is open 6 days a week.


b. There are more than 50 stores in the mall.


c. Every one in the neichborhood is pleased about
the new mall.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
d. It will be more comfortable to shop in the mall


than in the present shopping area.


e. Some of the stores on TP street may have to


close.


<b>2. While </b>–<b> reading:</b>


Read and Check<b>:</b>


T.asks Ss to read the text and check their
prediction.


Keys: a, F; b, F; c, F; d, T; e, T
Questions: P. 68


T.runs through and asks Ss to read the text agin and
anser the questions in pairs.


a. All the shops are under one roof.


b. There are 50 stores, 4 movie theatres...
c. They think it will take their business.


d. Some of the goods in the stores in the mall will
offer a wide selection of products, some at cheaper
prize.


<b>3. Post </b>–<b> reading: </b>


Recall:


T. uses the cues below on the text P.67 (text book)
to talk about the shopping mall.



Example: Tran Phu shopping mall is different from
the present shopping area. All the stores are under
one roof.Its opens daily from 9 A.M to 10


P.M.There are 50 air-conditioned special stores….


Ss work ind.,then in 2 groups;
predict the statements are true or
false.


Ss read the text again and check
their prediction ind.,then share in
pairs and in groups.


Ss work in pairs reading the text
again and answer the questions on
page 67.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups talking about the shopping
mall.


<b>IV. Consolidation: </b>(involved)


<b>V. Home work:</b>
<b> - </b>Memorize vocab.


<b> - </b>Read the text again and answer the questions.
<b>- </b>Revisethe Present Perfect Tense.<b> </b>



<b> - </b>Prepare Unit 7: My neighhood (section Write P.68)


<i> ( writing a notice)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 42

<b>Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD</b>



<i>Lesson 5: Write P.68</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write a notice.


<b> I. Knowledge: </b>How to write a notice


<b> II. Skills:</b> Writing and reading


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I. Settlement:</b> Greeting and check the attendance


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Warm-up:</b>


T.asks Ss to put the follwing information in the


right order of the notice ind,then in pairs and in
groups.


<i>a. Please contact Mr An at the above address for</i>
<i>more information.</i>


<i>b. Date: December 15th</i>


<i>c. Table: tennis club</i>


<i>d. 40 Le Loi street - D Hoa town</i>
<i>e. Time: 7.00 am</i>


Key: c - b - e - d - a


<b>2. Pre - writing</b>


Pre-Teach:


a resident (example)
an effect (translation)
a hard ware store (example)
(to) contact (translation)
(to) hold (example)


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab: R.O.R



Comprehension Questions:


T. asks Ss to read the notice P.68 to answer
questions.


a. Who hold the meeting ?


<i> (TP residents and the store owers)</i>


b. What’s the purpose of the meeting ?


<i> (To discuss the effects of new mall)</i>


c. What’s the date ?<i> (20. May / 8 am)</i>


d. What’s the place of the meeting ?


<i> (Binh s hard ware store, 12 Hang Da street)</i>’
e. Who’s the person to contact ? <i>(Pham Van Tai)</i>


<b>3. While </b>–<b> writing:</b>


Activity 1:T. asks Ss to read the text in Tast 2 (P.68
in textbook) to complete the notice.


Suggested notice:


The English Speaking Club



HOLDING A SPEAKING CONTEST TO CELEBRATETHE TEACHER’S
DAY


Date : Nov 15


Time : &.30 P.M to 10.00 P.M


Ss work for a correct format of a
notice.


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the stress
– meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Ss work in two teams.


Ss read the notice to answer
questions ind.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
Place : Hall Building G


Please contact : Tran Thi Thu Hang, class 8H a
the address above for more information.


Activity2: T asks Ss to write a notice about their
class meeting ind.,then share in pairs and in
groups(use the same guide questions above).



<b>4. Post - writing:</b> Exhibition


T.asks Ss to write their notice on the board or stick
their posters on the board and elicits the correction
from Ss and then gives the feedback.


Ss copy the notice into the notebook.


Ss to write a notice about their class
meeting ind.,then share in pairs and
in groups.


Ss write the notices or stick the
posters on the board and correct
aech other.


<b>IV. Consolidation: </b> (involved in Post-writing stage)


<b>V. Home work:</b>


- Complete the notice into the notebook.
- Memorize vocab.


- Revise the format of a notice.


- Prepare Languge focus for the next class.


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>



---Date<b>:</b>


Period : 43<b> </b>

<b>Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD</b>



<i>Lesson 6:Language Focus P.69 - 71</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use “since for” and
compare some things.


<b> I. Knowledge:</b>- Present perfect tense,comparisions


<b> II. Skills:</b>Speaking and writing


<b>B. PROCEDURE</b>


<b> I. Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II. Checking ( N</b>o checking)


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Presentation</b>


- Gives the situation and turns out the model
sentence, the comparation


- Gives the form, use, meaning.
a, The present perfect tense


Form: (+) S + have / has + P2
(-) S + have / has + not + P2
(?) Have / has + S + P2 ?
- Since: a poit of time


Since Monday, since 1987
- For: a period of time
For 2 days, for 3 weeks
b, Comparation


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
+ As + Adj + As: So sạnh b ịngà


+ different from: So sạnh sỉû khaïc nhau
+ The same as ...:


<b>2. Practice</b>


<b>T. asks </b>Ss to do exercise number 1 P.69 by
playing game palmanism


Be Go See Do Write


Been Seen Done Gone Written
- Number 2. P.69 Asks Ss to complete the
expressions.


Keys: for / since / since / since
for / for / since / for



T. asks Ss to use the present perfect form of
the verb in number 3 P.69


Keys:


b, havenot eaten
c, have not seen
d, have attended
e, has worked
f, has collected


T. asks Ss to complete the conversation
Keys:


1: have been 2: hope
3: have....lived.... 4: is
5: want 6: looks
7: have been 8: have seen
T. asks Ss to do number 5 (P.70)
Keys:


c, different from d, the same as
e, not as big as f, the same as
g, as long as h, not as modern as
I, not as cheap as


-Work in groups


- Work ind. to complete the expressions



- Work ind.

.

<sub></sub> share with apartner


- Work in pair to complete the
conversation and then practice


- Work ind.


<b>IV. Consolidation</b>


- Recalls the form


<b>V. Home work</b>


- Do exercise: 7 (P.48; P.49)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

<b>A. OBJECTIVES: </b>By the end of this lesson , Ss will be able to know about the changes
in the countryside nowadays.


<b> I. Knowledge:</b>- Present Progressive to show changes with get and become .


<b> II. Skills:</b> Speaking and reading


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I. Settlement: </b>Greeting and check the attendance



<b> II. Checking: </b>He (attend)…….this school since last year. <i>(has attended)</i>


<i> </i> We ( not/eat)…….in this restaurant since last year. <i>(haven t eaten))</i>’


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Warmer: </b>(Getting started)


T. asks Ss to look at these pictures on P.72 and
makes questions:


- Is this the countrylife ?


- Are there any different between the city life
with the the country life ?


T.asks Ss to make a list of differnces b/t the
countryside and the city using the given words
ind.,in pairs and in groups..


City Country
noisy


polluted air
tall buindings


many kinds of goods
many entertainments


much traffic


modern


quiet / peacefull
fresh air


small houses / cottages
fresh foods


friendly
little trafic
beautiful viems


<b>2. Presentation:</b>


Pre-Teach:


medical facility (n) (picture)


permanently (adv) (synonym: forever)
accessible (adj) (translation)


remote areas (n) (picture)
definitely (adv) (explanation)


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports on the board-stress-meaning.


<i>Check: Matching (Answer keys )</i>



Presentation Dialogue :


T.asks Ss to listen to the diologue and then practice
in pairs


Model Sentences


( T asks: How do you think about the countrylife
now ?)


Countrylife <b>is changing</b> better.


Ss work ind. to put the words into
the right picture.


Ss copy down.




Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the
stress – meaning and copy into
the notebook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
Many remote areas <b>are getting</b> electricity.


T.elicits the model sentences-T.modelsT. asks Ss to


repeat in choral-ind.-and then T.copies on the
board-and does the concept check.


Form:


S + <i>is/am/are</i> + chang<i>ing</i>/ gett<i>ing</i> /becom<i>ing </i>+ Adj
Uses: Talking abou the changes


<b>3 Practice : </b>


Word Cue Drill 1. The air/ city/ get/ pulluted
2. My father/ get/ older


3. The weather/ become/ colder.
4. The/ town/ become/ busier


T. asks Ss to use the cues to make the sentences
ind.,then share in pairs and ingroups.


Answer<i>: </i>1. The air in the city is getting polluted
2. My father is getting older .


3. The weather is becoming colder .
4. The town is becoming busier


<b>4 Production: </b>Discussion


T.asks Ss to discuss the question “ Do you prefer to
live in the countryside of in the city ? Why? ’’



Ss answer T’s model elicitation
questions-repeat in chral-ind.-copy
into the notebook-answer T’s
questions about concept check.


Ss work ind., then in pairs and in
groups.


Ss work in groups for the
discussion.


<b>IV. Consolidation:</b>


- Recalls the results of the dscussion.


<b>V. Home work:</b>


- Do exercise: 7 (P.48; P.49)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 45

<b>Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE</b>


<i> Lesson 2: Speak and Listen P.74</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: </b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talking about the changes
of their town and,villagesor neighborhood and listen to get information about an


arrangement.



<b> I. Knowledge: </b>Present Propgressive tense with “ get” and “become”.


<b> II. Skills:</b> Speaking and Listening


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I. Settlement: </b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II. Checking: </b>* Read the dialougue and answer the questions on P.73


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Warmer: </b>


T.asks Ss to look at the pictures P.73 and find out
the changes in the two pictures.


Example: horses , streets


<b>2. Pre-Speaking:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
T. asks Ss to remind what Hoa said about the


countryside nowadys.


* Things <i>are changing</i> in the countrside.


* Countrylife <i>is changing</i> better.


* Many remote areas <i>are getting</i> electricity.


T. reminds or asks Ss to recall the Present
Progressive Tense in the sentences above.


Form:


S + <i>is/am/are</i> + chang<i>ing</i>/ gett<i>ing</i> /becom<i>ing </i>+ Adj
Uses: Talking abou the changes


<b>3.While-Speaking : </b>
<b> </b>Activity 1


T. asks Ss to look at the pictures on P.74 and then
work in groups to find out the differences b/t the
two pictures.


1. Houses: small,tall,big


2. Means of transport: bike,motorbike,car
3. Streets: quiet,busy,noisy


4. Shops: a lot of shops,goods,prices
5. Children: many not go to school,go to school
6. Environment: trees,parks


Activity 2:



T. asks Ss to look at the 2 pictures on page 74, work
ind.,then share in pairs and in groups talking about
the changes b/t the two pictures.


Example:


Five years ago, the town was quiet, but now it is
becoming busier.


<b>4 . Post-Reading: </b>Listening


T.asks Ss to look at the open dialogue and guess
the missing words, then listen to the tape and check
their prediction ind.,then in pars and in then
groups.


Answer:


1.that 8.arriving
2.this 9.Thursday


3.It’s 10. late afternoon
4.Where 11.speak


5.from 12.my
6.coming 13.get
7.week


Ss to remind what Hoa said about
the countryside nowadys.



Ss to recall the Present Progressive
Tense in the sentences above.


Ss to look at the pictures on P.74
and then work in groups to find out
the differences b/t the two pictures.


Ss look at the 2 pictures on page 74,
work ind.,then share in pairs and in
groups talking about the changes b/t
the two pictures using the Present
Progressive tense and the given
cues above.


Ss to look at the open dialogue and
guess the missing words in groups.


Ss listen to the tape and check their
prediction ind.,then in pars and in
then groups.


<b> IV. Consolidation: </b>


T. asks Ss to write about the chages in their village or neighborhood.*
Example: Roads are becoming larger.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

- Revise the Present Progressive Tense to talk about the changes.
- Complete the writing into the notebook.



- Prepare Unit 8 : Country life and City life ( Readd P.75)


<i> ( Problems of big cities)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 46

<b>Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE</b>


<i> Lesson 3: Read P.75</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES:</b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to read a text and understand
the main ideas and the details.


<b> I. Knowledge: </b>The problems of big cities


<b> II. Skills:</b> Reading and Speaking


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I. Settlement: </b> greeting and check the attendance


<b> II. Checking: *</b>T. asks Ss to talk about the changes in the village or neighborhood.


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Warmer: </b> T. asks Ss some questions.
a) Why do people want to go to the city ?



b) What problems may arise when so many people
move to the city?


<b>2. Pre </b>–<b> Reading:</b>


Pre-Teach:


to struggle : (explanation)
typhoon : (n) (picture)
flood : (n) (example)
drought : (n) (antonym: food)
to distroy : (explanation)
stain (n) (explanation)
tragedy (n) (explanation)


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: R . O .R


Open Prediction:


T. runs through the summery and then asks Ss to
guess the missing words in the pagga P.75 (text
book) ind.- in pairs and in groups.


<b>2. While </b>–<b> Reading:</b>


Activity 1: T.asks Ss to read the text and check their
prediction.



Keys:


1- leaving 6.problems
2- home/house/family 7.schools


Ss asswer the questions.


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the stress
– meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Ss work ind.,then in 2 groups;
predict the statements are true or
false.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
3.city 8. hospitals


4.rural 9.problems
5.city 10.world
Activity 2:


T runs through and asks Ss to read the test again
and do Task 2 P.75 ind.-in pairs.


Ex: a) <i> of the countryside </i> rural
Answer



b) plentiful e) tragedy
c) increase f) urban
d)strain


<b>3. Post </b>–<b> Reading: </b>Language focus 4 P.79
T. asks Ss to make comparisions b/t the city and
the country about these things using the given
adjestives.


Ex: Food in the country is fresher the in the city.


Ss work in pairs reading the text
again and answer the questions on
page 67.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups talking about the shopping
mall.


<b>IV. Consolidation: </b>(involved)


<b>V. Home work:</b>
<b> - </b>Memorize vocab.


<b> - </b>Read the text again and answer the questions about the problems of the cities.
<b>- </b>Compete the comparision nito the notebook.


<b> - </b>Prepare Unit 8 : Country life and City life ( section write P.76)



<i> ( format of an informal letter)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period : 47

<b>Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE</b>



<i> Lesson 4 : Write P. 76</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write a letter to their
friends.


<b> I. Knowledge: </b>format of an informal letter


<b> II. Skills:</b> Writing


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I. Settlement:</b> Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II. Checking: </b>Read the text again and make a summery of the text.


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Warm-up:</b>


T.asks Ss some questions.



<i>a. Have you ever written a letter?</i>


<i>b. How often do you write to their friends?</i>
<i>c. How any sections are there in a letter?</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>2. Pre - Writing</b>


Activity 1:T. asks Ss to work ind. to put the
outline for an informal letter in the correct
order.


Answer:
Heading


<i> * Writer s name</i>’


<i> * Dtae</i>
<i> * Dear</i>


Opening


Body of the letter
Closing


Activity 2:


T.runs through and then asks Ss to ask and


answer the questions on P.76-Task 2 ind.,then
in pairs.


<b>3. While </b>–<b> Writing:</b>


T. asks Ss to work ind. to practice writing a
letter to a friend,using the answer above.


<b>4. Post - Writing:</b> Sharing and Comparing
T.asks Ss to share and compare their letters
with their partners.Then T.chooses the best
ones and gives the feedback on them.


Possible letter


<i>Adress</i>
<i>Date</i>
<i>Dear..,</i>


<i>I live in Hai Lang, a small town.My family</i>
<i>has a small house with 4 rooms.My brother</i>
<i>and I share one bedroom. It s lots of</i>’


<i>fun.Outside my window is a garden with a lot</i>
<i>of trees,flowers.We don t live far from my</i>’


<i>school, so that I can walk there.</i>


<i>In my neighborhood, there is a swimming</i>
<i>pool and a beautiful park.On the weekend, I</i>


<i>go swimming or fishing with my friends.But</i>
<i>the thing I like best in my neighborhood is the</i>
<i>library near my school.There I can not only</i>
<i>study , read books , but also watch videos and</i>
<i>learn how to use the computer.</i>


<i>Do you have a school like that in your</i>
<i>neighborhood? Is there anything interesting</i>
<i>where you live?Write to me.</i>


<i>I d like to say goodbye now. I m looking</i>’ ’


<i>forward to hearing from you soon.</i>
<i>Sincerely,</i>


<i>( Nam )</i>


Ss work for a correct format of a notice.


Ss ask and answer the questions on
P.76-Task 2 ind.,then in pairs.


Ss work ind. for writing the letter.


Ss share and compare their letters with
their partners.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

<b>IV. Consolidation: </b> (involved)


<b>V. Home work:</b>



- Complete the letter into the notebook.
- Memorize the format of the letter.


- Prepare Unit 8: Country life and City life ( Language Focus).


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:48

<b>Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE</b>



<i> Lesson 6: Language focus (P. 82)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the future ,to comparate something.
<b>I. Knowledges</b>: Present Progressive with get and become


<b> II.Skill</b>: writing, speaking


<b> III.Preperation</b>: book, board and pictures


<b> B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking</b>: ( No checking )
<b>III.New lesson</b>:



<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1.Dialogue.</b>


T. reads the dialogue as a model ,then asks Ss to
read the dialogue again andmake similar
dialogues using the given shipping information in
pairs.


In pairs,T.asks Ss to practice the dialogues in
front of the class.


<b>2. Present Prigressive Tense.</b>


T. asks Ss to recalls the form fo Present
Progressive Tense .


Form: S + Is/Am/Are +V-ing.


T. runs through and then asks Ss to complete the
dialogue.


Answer:


1. are doing 2. am listening to
3. am going to 4. are cleaning
5. am having


T. asks Ss to practice the dialogue.



<b>3.Present Progressiveto talk about the change </b>
<b>with Get and become :</b>“ ”


Example: The boys are getting taller.


T. asks Ss to complete the sentences using the
adjectives in the box ind.-in pairs.


Answer


b.The old men are getting weak.
c.It is getting dark.


d.The weather is becoming cold.
e. The students are changing better.
f. The school yard is becoming cleaning


<b>4.Comparation</b>


Task 1:


T.asks Ss to make comparisions between the city
and the country ind.,then in pairs and in groups.
Answer:


Ss listen and make the similar
dialogues using the shipping
information and then practice the
dialogue in pairs.



Ss retell the form of the Present
Progressive.And then complete the
dialogue using the verbs in Present
progressive.


In pairs, Ss practice the dialogue.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
a.The food in the city is more expensive than in


the country.


b.The traffic in the city is bussier than in the
country.


c.The transport in the city is easier than in the
country.


d.The air in the city is more polluted than in the
country.


e.The entertainments in the country are poorer
than in the city.


f.The medicalf acilities in the city are more
accessible than in the country.


g.The schools in the city are better than in the
city.



h.The electricity in the country is worse than in
the city.


Task 2:T. asks Ss to compare the house,the villa,
and the apartment ind.,then in pairs and in
groups.


Answer


-The apartment is cheaper than the villa.
-The villa is bigger than the apartment.


-The house is more expensive than the apartment.
-The villa is the oldest home.


-The villa is more beautiful than the apartment.
..


……


Ss work in groups to compare these
things between the city and country.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups to compare the house,the
villa,and the apartment.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>: (involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:



- Revise all revised and studied knowledge for the next class.


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:49


<b>REVISION</b>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to revise some studied
knowledge.


<b> I.Knowledges: </b>Present Progressive , The Simple Present, Simple Past Tense, Used
to, Enough+ Adj +to +V-inf……..


<b> II.Skills:</b>writing, speaking


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking:</b> No check
<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1. Presentation:</b>



T. asks Ss to recalls some studied knowledge.
a.The Simple Present


Form : S+ V-es/s+O


Use : Telling about the truth.
b.Be Going To


Talking about intention
c.The Simple Past Tense
Form : S+ V-ed.


Use : Talking about events ,actions which finished
d.Used to.


Form : S+ Used to + V-infinitive.


Use : Talking about past habits which are now
finished.


Listen and answer the questions
in dividually


I offten go to school in the
morning?


I am going to school.you doing?
I watched TV last night


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


d. Enough.+ Adj +To +V-inf


<b>2. Practice:</b>


Put the verbs into the correct form:


a. They …..( speak ) English for over five years.
b. Yesterday,She…. (eat) noodles.


c. Tomorrow I… ….(be) going to go to the cinema
with you.


d. Hoa used to…. (take) her child to school.
e….he use to….. (play) football ? Yes, he did.
f. The sun …..(rise) in the east.


T.asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs and in groups
putting the verbs into the correct form.


Answer:


a.have spoken d.take
b.ate e.Did-play
c.am f.rises


Rewrite these sentences :


a.She is strong .She can carry this bag.(Enough)
………
b.The fire is not hot.It will not boil a kettle.



………
c.The table is too heavy to lift up. ( enough)
The table isn’t ……… ……….
d.Ba said “I will read this book “


………


e.Nhi asked Nga “Can you come here now?”


………
f.”Please turn on the fan for me”,his mother asked me
………
Answer:


a.She is strong enough to carry this bags.
b.The fire is not hot enough to boil the water.
c.The table isn’t heavy enough (for me) to lift up.
d.Ba said he would read this book.


e.Nhi asked Nga to go there.


f.His mother told him to turn on the fan for her.


Choose the answer (A, B, C or D) that best fits each of
blank spaces:


One (1)_____ the most famous statue in the (2)
________stands on the New York harbor. This (3)
_____ is, of course, The Statue of Liberty. The Statue


of Liberty is a woman who holds a touch up high.
Visitors can go (4) _______ the statue. The statue
weighs 225 tons and is 301 feet high. This statue was
presented to the United States (5) _______ France in
1876.


1. A. between B. in C. ofD. from


2. A. cities B. world C. countriesD. earth
3. A. harbor B. island C. statuesD. statue
4. A. inside B. outside C. fromD. out
5. A. to B. byC. forD. with


T. runs through and then asks Ss to work ind.,then in
pairs and in groups filling in the gaps with suitable
word.


Answer:


1. C-of 4. A-inside
2. B-world 5. B-by
3. C-statue


Work ind. to to put the verbs in
the correct tense.


a. spoke
b. ate
c .am
d.take



e .Did –play
f. rises


Ss work in ind. to rewrite these
sentences .


a. She is strong enough.to carry
this bag.


b.The fire is not hot enough.to
boil a kettle


c.It is warm enough for us to.go
swimming.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:(involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:


-Revise all studied knowledge for the next revision period.


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:50 <b> </b>

<b>REVISION</b>


<b> A.OBJECTIVES</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to remain knowledge from unit 5 to unit8
<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Present Progressive with get and becomes


<b> II.Skills:</b> writing, speaking


<b> B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking:</b> No check
<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Presentation:</b>


T.asks Ss to recalls some studied knowledge.
How long have you learn English?


What is the weather like?
Form:


a.The present perfect


Form : S+ have/ has +P2.
Ex:I have learnt English since 2000.
She has lived in VH for 3 years
b.The present progressive tense


Form : S+ is/am /are +V-ing


Use : to talk about the future and to show the
changes with get and become


Ex:


The men are getting clever
The rivers are becoming drier.
c. Comparative and superlative


Comparative:


+ Short adj + ER + than…..
+More + Long adj +than …..
Ex:


I am taller than Hoa.


I am more beautiful than Hoa.
Superlative:


+The + Short adj + EST…..
+The most + Long adj …..
c. Should /Ought to/Must +V-inf.


d. Ask/said /told +SO +to do some thing.


<b>Ex:</b>


She is the tallest girl.



Hoa is the most beautiful girl in my class.


<b>2. Practice:</b>


Put the verbs in the correct tense


T.asks Ss to put the verbs in the correct tense.
a. She asks me …(buy) a book.


b. Linh told me ….(meet) Tom at here.


c. Miss Chau said “You should ….(leart) lesson


<b>Ss </b>recalls some studied knowledge.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


at home”.


d. They…(live ) in VH since 40 years
e .You …(live ) in VH for 4 years
Answer:


a. to buy
b. to meet
c. leart
d. have lived
e. have lived
f. has ..eaten
g. Have…seen


h. Saw


i. Hottest
j. Coldest
k. Shorter


l. More expensive
Rewrite these sentences.


T.asks Ss to rewrite the following sentences.
1.’’Please lend me your dictionary,lan” said
Hoa.


..


………


2 ‘’Can you help me with my homework?”
Minh said to her sister……….
3’’You should practice EL every day” the
teacher said me.


..


………


Answer:


1.Hoa asked Lan to lend her
dictionary.



2. Minh asked her sister to help her with her
homeworl.


3 . The teacher asked me.to practice EL every
day


T.asks Ss to put the given sections of a letter in
the order for a good letter.


1.Dear Lan,
2 Your friend.


3 Next Sunday Father will drive Mom and
me to DS Water Park .


4. 99 Le loi street


5. Please let me know whether you can go .
6 .Can you join us?


7 .Mai Huong.


8 .December 14,2004.


9 .We can stop at your house at about 8.30
to pick you up.


10 .Ho chi minh city



Keys: 4-10-8-1-3-6-9-5-2-7


Ss rewrite the following sentences.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in groups
putting the given sections of a letter in
the order for a good letter.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:(involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:


-Revise all studied knowledge for the next revision period.


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:51


<b>REVISION</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to remain knowledge in the first term and know
the mistakes from the terminal test.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>


<b> II.Skills:</b>writing, speaking


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:



<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking:</b> No check


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher</b>’<b>s activities</b> <b>Students activities</b>’
I. <b>Warm up:</b> Slap the board


increase plentiful
play games


rural term
T.asks Ss to work in groups of five with the game.
II. <b>Practice</b>:


Odd one out :


1. a. near b. read c. teacher
2. a. right b. opposite c. city
3. a. movie b. hotel c. old
4. a. behind b. police c. children


5. a. temple b. museum c. restaurant
6. a. mountain b. house c. country


7. a. paddy b. game c. day
8. a. late b. lake c. small



Answer:


1 - a ; 2 - c ; 3 - c ; 4 - a ; 5 - b ; 6 - c ; 7 - a ; 8 - c
Build up complete sentences using given words and
phrases:


1. a quarter / my father / bed / to / to / at / goes / eleven.
………...
2. a / is / Lan’s / garden / there / big / house / behind.
………...
3. any / street / there / the / aren’t / on / trees.


………...
4. many / there / house / clocks / how / her / in / are?
………...
Answer:


1. My father goes to bed at a quarter to elevent.
2.There is a big gardent behind Lan’s house.
3.There aren’t any tall trees on the streets.
4.How many clocks are there in her house?
Put the verbs in the Simple Present Tense


1.Bao (play) ...badminton after school.
2.My sister ( live)...in HaNoi.


3.Hoa(listen)...to music every afternoon.
4.My mother( get )...up at six every morning.
5.Our house ( have)... a big yard.



6.We( play)...games every afternoon.


7.Thu and Phong (do)... our homework after
class.


8.His mother (go)... to work by bus.


T.asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs putting the verbs in


Ss work in groups of five with
the game.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups odding one out.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups putting the given words
or phrases for good sentences.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

<b>Teacher</b>’<b>s activities</b> <b>Students activities</b>’
Simple Present Tense.


Answer:


1.plays 5.has
2.lives 6.play
3.listens 7.do
4.gets 8.goes
Gap fill:



Nam ……….... twelve years old. He lives in a………..
with his family. His house is next……..a bookstore. In
the neighborhood, there……..a hospital, a factory and a
market. Nam’s father …………in the hospital. Nam
goes to school at six fifteen. Classes start ……….seven
and end eleven fifteen.


T.runs through and then asks Ss to work ind. in pairs
-groups.


Answer:
1. is
2. house
3. to
4. is
5. works
6. at


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups filling in the gaps with
suitable words.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:(involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:


-Revise all studied knowledge for the next revision period.


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>



---Date:


Period:52


<b>REVISION</b>



<b> A.OBJECTIVES</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to remain knowledge in the first term and know
the mistakes from the terminal test.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>


<b> II.Skills:</b> writing, speaking


<b> B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking:</b> No check
<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


1.Choose the correct answer for each sentence:
1. Hoa______ in Hue last year.


a. lives
b. lived
c. living



2. Ba is not old enough________ a car.
a. drive


b. drives
c. to drive


3. Trang had a new book and she has no
homework today. She is going to _______
a. read


b. do homework
c. see a movie


4. Ba and Bao _________ chess tomorrow.
a. play b. played c. will play


5. Minh is usually late for school. He ought to


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


_________.


a. go to school late
b. get up early


c. do a lot of homework


Answer
1. b. lived



2. c. to drive


3. c. see a movie


4. c. will play
5. b. get up early


T.asks Ss to choose the correct answer for each
sentence.


2.Put the words in suitable form
1.She …just…(eat) cakes.
2.You….(see) him?


3.Yes,I ..(see) him yesterday.
4.The summer is the…(hot) in VN.
5.Winter is the…(cold) in VN.
Answer:


1.has just eaten
2.did-see


3.saw
4.hottest
5.coldest


T.asks Ss to supply the suitable word form.


3.Read the text and answer the questions


6.This ruler is…(short) than that ruler
This bike is ….(expensive) than that bike.
Alexander Graham Bell was born in Scotland
on March 3, 1847. He later emigrated first to
Canada and to the USA in 1870s. Bell and his
assistant, Thomas Watson, conducted many
experiments and finally came up with the first
telephone in 1876. Traveling all over America,
Bell demonstrated his invention at a lot of
exhibitions.


Questions:


1. Was Bell born in Scotland in 1847?
………
2. Where did he emigrate later?


………


3. Who is his assistant?


………


4.When did they invent the first telephone?


………


T.asks Ss to read the text again and answer the
questions.



Answer:
1.Yes,he was.


2.He later emigrated first to Canada and to the
USA in 1870s.


3.Thomas Watson was his assistant.


4.They invented the first telephone in 1876.


Ind.,then in pairs and in groups,Ss
supply the suitable word form.


Ind.,then in pairs and in groups,Ss to
read the text again and answer the
questions.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:(involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:53


<b>1</b>

<b>st</b>

<b><sub> semester test</sub></b>



<b>A/ Objective</b>:



Helping Ss to do the test individually and independently. Finding out what Ss have gained
and what they haven/<sub>t gained in the first semester.</sub>


<b>B/(Ma trËn) </b>


<i><b>C.Questionares: (§Ị ra)</b></i>


<b>I/.Listening: (2.5 mark) Listen then answer true or false?</b>


...1. Lan is calling Mrs.Hang.




2. Mrs.Hang is in Hue.


……


3. Mrs.Hang and her children are going to visit Lan next week.


……


4. They are arriving in Ha Noi on Thursday.


……


5. Mrs.Hang can not speak to Lan


…… /<sub>s mother because she isn</sub>/<sub>t at home.</sub>



<b>II/Reading:(2.5 mark) Read the passage then answer the questions below.</b>


Every year students in many countries learn English. Some of these students are young
children. Others are teenagers. Many are adults.Some learn at school, others study by
themselves. Why do all these people want to learn English? Many boys and girls learn
English at school because it is one of their subjects. Many adults learn English because it
is useful for their work. Teenagers often learn English for their higher study. Others learn
English because they want to read newspaper or magazines in English.


1. Do many people in the world learn English every year?


...


………


2. How do they learn English?


..


………


3. Is English a subject at school?


..


………


4. Why do many adults learn English?


..5. Do some



………


people learn English in order to read newspapers or magazines?


Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng


TN TL TN TL TN TL


I.Listening 5


2,5 5 2,5


II.Reading 5


2,5 5 2,5
III.Language


focus 10 2,5 10 2,5


IV.Writing 5


2,5 5 2,5


Tæng 15


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

...


………



<b>III/ Language focus: (2.5 mark)</b>


<b>A. Phonetice: Circle the leter before the word that has the underlined part </b>
<b>pronunced differently.</b>


1. A. f<b>a</b>cility B. n<b>a</b>ture C. panc<b>a</b>ke D. gr<b>a</b>ze
2. A. <b>e</b>nroll B. comm<b>e</b>nt C. m<b>e</b>mory D. m<b>e</b>ssage
3. A. un<b>i</b>te B. underl<b>i</b>ne C. exc<b>i</b>ted D. c<b>i</b>tizenshift


<b>B. Vocabulary: Odd one out</b>


1. A. swimming B. clothing C.learning D. collecting
2. A.friendly B. badly C. quickly D. carefully
3. A. peaceful B. fresh air C. crowded D. quiet


<b>C. Grammar: Choose the best answer:</b>


1. I used to………….to school by bike last year.


A. going B. to go C. go D. went
2. The teacher told me…………noise in the class.


A. not making B. not to make C. not make D. don/<sub>t make</sub>
3. Minh hates………..television.


A. watch B. to watch C. watching D. watches
4. My report card is different……….your report card.


A. to B. from C. as D. with



<b>IV. Writing: (2.5 mark) Complete the leter below</b>


Dear Hoa,


1. I/ having/ interesting activity/ next week.


………


2. The Y&Y/ planning/ help/ poor students.


………


3. In this program, we/ raise/ funds/ in order to/ buy book/ clothes/ poor classmates.


………


4. I hope/ we/ make/ some poor friends/ happy.


………


5. the program/ interesting?


………


Write to me soon and tell me all your news.
Love,


Lan


<i>The end</i>



( Ghi chú: GV dùng băng nghe Anh 8-Unit 8 page74 cho phÇn nghe)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:54


<b>correct the 1</b>

<b>st</b>

<b><sub> semester test</sub></b>

<sub>(45”)</sub>



<b>A/ Objective</b>:


-Help Ss to find out their mistakes


-Find out excellent students and poor students.
-Give mark.


<b>B/ Class time:</b>


<b>I. Listening</b>: 2,5 điểm. Mỗi ý đúng = 0,5 điểm.
1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T 5. F


<b>II. Reading</b>: 2,5 điểm. Mỗi ý đúng = 0,5 điểm.
1. Yes, they do.


2. Some learn at school, others study by themselves.
3. Yes, it is.


4. Because English is useful for their work.


5. Yes, they do.


<b>III. Language focus</b>: 2,5 điểm. Mỗi ý đúng = 0,25 điểm.


<b>A. Phonetice</b>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

<b>B. Vocabulary</b>:


1. B 2. A 3. C


<b>C. Grammar</b>:


1. C 2. B 3. C 4. B


<b>IV. Writing</b>: 2,5 điểm. Mỗi ý đúng = 0,5 điểm.
1. I am having an interesting activity next week.
2. The Y&Y is planning to help poor students.


3. In this program, we will rais funds in order to buy books and clothes for our poor
classmates.


4. I hope we can make some poor friends happy.
5. Is the program interesting?


OR: The program is interesting, isn/<sub>t it?</sub>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date :



Period:55

<b>Unit 9:A FIRST </b>

<b>AID COURSE</b>



<i>Lesson1:Getting Started -Listen and read (P.80-81)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to know about first aid
course.


<b>I.Knowledges</b>: Giving instructions (impeatives)


<b> II.Skill</b>:Speaking and Listening


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking</b>: (No checking)
<b>III.New lesson</b>:


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Revison:</b>Getting started


T uses the pictures on P.81 to give some questions:
Example:


a.Do you often use these thing ?
b.When do you use them?


<b>2.Presentation:</b>


Pre-teach



(to ) cover the wound (gesture/mime)
(to) stop bleeding (realia)


(to) hold tight (mine)
(to) fall off one’s bike (picture)
bandage(n) (realia)
cotton ball (n) (realia)
alcohol (n) (realia)


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports vocab on the
board-stress-meaning.


Check voacb: Slap the board


hold tight stop bleeding


alcohol bandage bandage
Presentation dialogue: Listen and read (P.80)
T.asks Ss to listen to the dialogue.


T. asks Ss to read the dialogue again and then
answer the following questions.T,models.


<i>What will you do when your friend falls off his</i>
<i>/herbike?</i>


-stop the bleeding


-cover the wound


..




Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the stress
– meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Ss work in two groups with the
game.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

<b>3.Practice:</b>


T. gives some situations and asks Ss to list the first
aid-courses.


<i>a. A girl has a burn on her arm</i>
<i>b. A boy has a nose bleed</i>


Example: <i>A girl has a burn on her arm</i>


- cool the burn


Ease pain with ice……..


<b>4.Further Practice: </b>Chain game



T. gives the situation: “ A boy has a bad cut on his
finger”


Example:


S1: stop the bleeding


S2: stop the bleeding and cover the wound….


Ss work in groups to list the first
aid-courses


Ss work in groups to list the first aid
course.




<b>IV.Consolidation:</b>(involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:


- Memorize Vocab


- Revise first aid course in some learnt situations.
- Do exercises 1+2 (P.55 in workbook)


- Prepare Unit 9: A First Aid Course - section''Speak and Listen" (P.81-82)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>



---Date :


Period:56

<b>Unit 9:A FIRST </b>

<b>AID COURSE</b>



<i>Lesson2:Speak and Listen (P.81-82)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to practice speaking, using
requests, offers and promises.


<b>I.Knowledges</b>: Can/Could you…?/Wii/Would you…?...


<b> II.Skill</b>:Speaking and Listening


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Revision</b> Matching


T. gives the situations and asks Ss to match them
with the pictures at P.82


Keys:


a.have a bad cut on her finger
b.have a headache


c,be bitten by asnake


d.have a fever


e.break the vase


<b>2.Pre </b>–<b>speaking:</b>


Presentation text.


T. asks Ss to readthe text, then asks Ss to practice
Model sentences


Request


Can/could (you give me a pen)?
Sure/Ok


I am sorry,I can not.
Offers:


Would you like some orange?
Yes ,please /No, thank you
Promises


I will meet you at ....


I hope so/ good/Do not forget


<b>3.While -speaking</b>


Models the situation in picture a at P.82



<b>4.Post-speaking:</b>


Asks Ss to do exercise 6P.57 in work book then
listen to the tape to put A...F in the corect order


Work in ind. to match them with the
pictures at P.82


isten and repeat in chorol,in groups,
ind.


Copy down


Work in pairs,using the pictures
b,c,d


S1:Can you give me a bandage?
S2: Sure ,here you are


Do exercise ind. Listen to the tape
to put A...F in the corect order


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:


Check the form : Can/ Could you....
Will/ Would you ...


I promise I will ../will not



<b> V.Homework</b>:


- Memorize Vocab


- Revise first aid course in some learnt situations.
- Do exercises 3 (P.56 in workbook)


- Prepare Unit 9: A First Aid Course - section''Read" (P.82-83)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date :


Period:57

<b>Unit 9:A FIRST </b>

<b>AID COURSE</b>



<i>Lesson 3:Read (P.83-84)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the main ideas
and details of the text.


<b>I.Knowledges</b>: First-aid course


<b> II.Skill</b>: Reading


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking</b>:
<b>III.New lesson</b>:



<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Revision </b>Jumbled Words


a. PAENTIT =
b. GUDR =
c. HOALCOL =
d. LOOC =
e. VELAE =


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


given letters for good words.
Answer


a.patient
b.drug
c.alcohol
d.cool
e.leave


<b>2.Pre-reading.</b>


Pre-Teach


(to ) force (explanation)
(to) elevate (mine)


(to) revise (explanation)
(to)minimize (explanation)


(to) over heat (explanation)
(to) ease (mine)


victim (explanation)


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports vocab on the
board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab<b>: </b>Slap the board
Open Prediction:


T. gives some situations and asks Ss to answer
questions:


What will you do if your friend has fainting/ a
shock/ burn?


<i> leave the patien lying flat cover the burned area</i>




<i> </i>Fainting Shock Burns


<i> </i>


<i> give the victim drugs</i>
<i> </i>


<b>3.While -Reading</b>



Activity 1:


T. asks Ss to read the text on P.83(textbook) and
check their ideas.


Answer keys:
Fainting:


-Leave the patient lying flat


-Don't let him or her to sit or stand.. Shock :
-Don't overheat the victim with blankets or coats
-Dont'give the victim any foot or drink...


Shock:


-Don’t cverheat the victim with blankets or coats.
-Don’t give the victim any food or drink.


-Don’t give the victim drugs or alchohol.
Burns:


-Ease pain with ice or cold water packs


-Cover the burned area with a sterile dressing...
Activity 2:


T. asks Ss to read the text tochoose a correct case
(P.84-text book)



Answer keys:


a.A b.B c.A d.C e A


<b>4.Post-Reading</b>


T. asks Ss to do exercises 2,3(P.55-56- work book)


the game to revise studied vocab.


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the
stress – meaning and copy into
the notebook.


Ss work in two groups with the
prediction.




Ss work ind., then in pairs and in
groups to read the text to check
their ideas for the real cases.


Ss work ind., then in pairs and in
groups to read the text to check
their ideas.





</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

<b>IV. Consolidation:</b>(involved)


<b>V. Homework</b>:


- Memorize vocab


- Revise first aid course in some learnt situations.


- Prepare Unit 9: A First Aid Course - section''Write" (P.84-85)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date :


Period:58

<b>Unit 9:A FIRST </b>

<b>AID COURSE</b>



<i>Lesson4:Write (P.84-85)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write a thank -you note.
<b>I.Knowledges</b>: Simple Past,Simple future


<b> II.Skill</b>: writing and reading


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance



<b> II.Checking</b>: Read the text again and give the first-aid course for given situations.
<b>III.New lesson</b>:


<b> Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Revision.</b>


Pelmanism


1 2 3 4 5
give send be recieve feel
a b c d e
felt recieved was/were sent gave
T. asks Ss to work ind., then in groups with the
game to revise the simple past form of the given
verbs.


Answer key:


1-e ; 2-d ; 3-c ; 4 -d ; 5-a


<b>2.Pre-writing </b>Gap-fill ( P.84-Write1 in
textbook)


T. asks Ss to complete the thank -you note Nga
send to Hoa.


Answer key:


1.was 2.were
3.helped 4.came


5.was 6.phoned


<b>3.While-writing:</b>


Activity 1:


T. asks Ss to ask and answer the questions on
(P.85-textbook) orally.


Activity 2:


Ind.,then in pairs and in groups, T. asks Ss to
practice writing a thank note, using the answers
above.


Example :


<i>Dear Phuong,</i>


<i>Thank you very much for the book you sent me</i>
<i>while I was in the summer holiday. It was</i>
<i>intersting and it realy helped me ...</i>


<i> Now I am going to go on a picnic .Would you</i>
<i>like to go with me ? I 'd love to see you.</i>


<i>I phoned you on Sunday morning </i>
<i>Your friend.</i>


<i>Lam</i>



Work ind. to play
game Pelmanism


Work in ind. to complete the thank
-you note Nga send to Hoa,use the
correct tense.Then share with a partner


Answer the questions at P.85
ind.


Work in ind. to write a thank -you
note,using the answer .Then share
ideas


Stick their poster on the board and
choose the best thank -note


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

<b> Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>




<b>4. Post-reading: </b>Exhibition


T. asks Ss to stick their poster on the board and
elicits the correction form the Ss. The T.gives
feedback.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>: Write 3 (P.85)*



<b>V.Homework</b>:


- Comlpte Write 3 (P.85) and the thank-note into the notebook.
-Revise the format of a thank-note.


- Prepare Unit 9:A First Aid Course – section “LANGUAGE FOCUS”


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date :


Period:59

<b>Unit 9: A FIRST -AIDCOURSE</b>


<i>Lesson 5:Language focus (P.86)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to make the requests, offers and promises and
know the way to use Simple Future


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>


Simple Future, in order to ,so as to
Can/ Could you....


Will/ Would you ...


I promise I will ../will not


<b> II.Skills</b>: Writing and Reading<b> </b>
<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:



<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking:</b>


<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


1.IN ORDER TO, SO AS TO:


T. asks Ss to match one of a sentence from column A
with part in colum B. Then write a complete a
sentenceby using "in order to /so as to" ind., then in
pairs.


Answer


1<i>.Mary wrote a notice on the board in order to</i>
<i>inform her classmates about the change in schedule.</i>
<i>2. Mr Green got up early this morning so as to get to</i>
<i>the meeting on time.</i>


<i>3.My elder brother studies hard this year in order to</i>
<i>pass the entrance exam to the university.</i>


<i>4.My elder brother studies hardin order to/so as </i>
<i>topass the entrance examto the university.</i>


<i>5.People use first-aid in order to/ so as to ease the </i>


<i>victim s pain and anxiety.</i>’


<i>6.You should cool the burns immediately so as to/in </i>
<i>order to minimize tissue damage.</i>


2.FUTURE SIMPLE:


T. asks Ss to complete the dialogue,use the correct
word or short form ind., then in pairs.


Answer key:
1. shall
2.Will
3.won't
4.Shall
5.will
6.will


Then T. asks Ss to practice the completed dialogue
in pairs.


Ss work ind. to match one of a
sentence from column A with part
in colum B .


Then write a complete a
sentenceby using "in order to /so
as to" individually,in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>



3.MODAL WILL TO MAKE REQUESTS, OFFERS
AND PROMISES:


Task 3(P. 87-textbook)


Ind. then in pairs, T. asks Ss to complete the
sentences ,using the words under each picture and
will for making requests.


<b> </b>Answer key:


b.Will you give it to me?


c Will you answer the telephone ?
d.Will you turn on T.V?


e.Will you pour a glass of water..?
f.Will you get a cushion?


T. asks Ss to work in pairs with the dialogue.
Task 4 (P. 88-textbook)


T. asks Ss to work ind., then in pairs making
requests ,offers or promise


Answer key:


Will you paint the door?
I promise I 'll study harder .


Shall I cary it for you?
Will you hang clother ?
Will you cut the vegetables?


Ss complete the sentences ,use the
words under each picture and will
ind. and then share in pairs.


In pairs, Ss practice the dialogue.


Ss work in pairs to make requests
,offers or promise.


<b>IV.Consolidation:</b>(involved)


<b>V. Homework</b>:


- Do Ex 6,7 P.57(in workbook)
- Memorize studied points.


- Prepare Unit 10:Recycling(Lesson 1:Getting started-Listen and read)


<i> (Adjectives followed by an an infinitive or a noun clause)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 60

<b>Unit 10: RECYCLING</b>




<i>Lesson 1:Getting started-Listen and Read(P.89-90)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to know about things we can reuse, reduce and
recycle.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Adjectives followed by an an infinitive or a noun clause


<b> II.Skills</b>: Speaking and Reading<b> </b>
<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking:</b>


<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1. Revision: </b> Getting Started (P.89-textbook)


T. asks Ss to answer the questions in pairs.


<i>What should you do to reduce the amount of</i>
<i>garbage we prodyce ?</i>


<b>2.Presentation:</b>


Pre-Teach



(to) over package (translation)
(to) reuse (explanation)
(to) reduce (explanation


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports vocab on the
board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab<b> : </b>Slap the board


Ss answer the questions in pairs to
list the ways to reduce the amount
of gabages that we produce.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


Presentation Dialogue


T. asks Ss to listen to the dialogue and then work in
pairs with the dialodue again.


Comprehension Questions: (P.90-text book)


T. runs throughT. asks Ss to work in pairs reading the
dialogue again and answer the questions.


Answer:


a.Reduce means not buying products which are
overpackaged



b.Envelopes,glass,plastic bottles and old plastic bags
c.Recycle means don't throw things away,tryand find
another use for them


d.Contact an organization like <b>Friends of the</b>
<b>earth</b>...


e.Because plastic bags can’t be reused as many times
as cloth bags.


Model Sentences:


It is not difficult to remember.


I am pleased that you want to know more.
T.elicits the model sentences-T.modelsT. asks Ss to
repeat in choral-ind.-and then T.copies on the
board-and does the concept check.


Form: It is + Adj +to + V-inf
S+be+Adj+that-clause


<b>3 Practice: </b>Brainstorming


T. asks Ss to read the dialogue to list the things they
can reuse and recycle.


Plastic bags used paper



Things we can reuse Things we can reduce


<b>4.Further Practice: </b> Mapped Dialogue
Miss Lam Ba


What /you/ protect/ We/remember/3 Rs
environment


What/they? Reduce,recycle,reuse
I/pleased /you understand It /uesful/know/how
the lesson protect /environment
T. runs through – elicits the questions and the
answers.Then models- pairwork.


Example Exchange:


Miss Lam: What should we do to protect
environment?


Ba: We should remember 3 Rs
Miss Lam: What are they?


Ba: They are,recycle,reuse ,reduce.


Miss Lam:I am pleased that you understand the
lesson


Ba: It is useful to know how to protect environment


Ss work with their partners with


the dialogue.


Listen and practice
Anser some qs


Ss answer T’s model elicitation
questions-repeat in chral-ind.-copy
into the notebook-answer T’s
questions about concept check.
Copy down the form


Ss work ind. ,then in pairs and in
groups list the things they can
reuse and recycle


Recycle: used paper,used cans..
Reuse : Envelopes,glass,plastic
bottles and old plastic bag...s


Ss look at the board for the given
cues.


Ss answer-listen to T. And then
work in open-closed pairs.


<b>IV. Consolidation</b>: (involved)


<b>V. Homework</b>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>



---Date:


Period: 61

<b>Unit 10: RECYCLING</b>


<i>Lesson 2:</i>

<i>Listen and Read P.90-91</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to know how to do with used things.
<b>I.Knowledges:</b>Giving instructions


<b> II.Skills</b>: Speaking and Listening<b> </b>
<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking: </b>Read the dialogue again and answer the questions?
<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1 Revision: </b>Matching


T. asks Ss to match the words in English and the
Vietnamese equivalence.


<b> A B</b>


1.reuse a. rác
2.recycle b. sợi (vải)
3.garbage c. kim loại


4.plastic d . phân xanh
5.fabric e . tái sử dụng
6.leather f . nhựa


7.metal g . tái chế
8.compost h . da thuộc
Answer keys:


1- e ; 2- g ; 3- a ; 4- f ; 5 - b ; 6- h ; 7- c ; 8- d


<b>2. Pre-speaking:</b>


T. asks Ss to look at the picture on P .91 (text book)
and decide which group each item belongs to.


Answer keys:


Paper: used news papers..
Glass: bottles..


Plastic: pastic bags ...
Fabric: clothes..
Leather: shoes..
Metal: drink cans


Vegetable matter: friut pees...


<b>3 While -speaking: </b>Mapped Dialogue


<i> Lan Ba</i>



Which group/ clothes Put/ fabric
/belong?


What /we /do /them? We/recycle/them/
to make/ paper/shopping
T. runs through – elicits the questions and the
answers.Then models- pairwork, using the words in
Pre-Speaking stage.


Answer


S1: Which group do clothes belong to?
S2: put them in fabric


S1: What can we do with them?


S2:We can recycle them and make them into paper
of shopping bags


Work ind. to match


Look at the picture on P .91 (text
book) and decide which group
each item belongs to


in ind.,-in groups


Ss look at the board for the given
cues.



Ss answer-listen to T. And then
work in open-closed pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>4.Post-speaking </b>


T.asks Ss to listen to the tape to check(P) the correct
answers.


Answer: a. A ; b. B ; c. B ; d. B


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>: (involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:


- Revise studied vocab and giving instructions.
- Revise how to do with used things.


- Prepare Unit 10 : Recycling ( section Read P.92-93)


<i> (Passive Voice)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 62

<b>Unit 10: RECYCLING</b>


<i>Lesson 3:</i>

<i>Read (P.92-93)</i>




<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the main ideas
and details of the text .


<b>I.Knowledges:</b>Passive forms


<b> II.Skills</b>: Reading andwriting<b> </b>
<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking: </b>Read the dialogue again and answer the questions on P.90?
<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Revision: </b>Brainstorming


<i> drink cans bottles </i>




Things we can recycle


T. asks Ss to work in groups filling the nets with
things that we can reuse.


Answer
- bottles
- drink cans
- uesd paper
……..



<b>2.Pre-Reading:</b>


Pre-Teach


(to ) melt (situation)
(to) refill (explanation)
deposit (n) (example)
glassware (n) (example)
floorcovering (n) (example)


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports vocab on the
board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab<b>: </b>What and where
T/F Statement Prediction.


T. runs through and then asks Ss to predict T/F in 2
teams.


1.Cars tires can be reused to make pipes and floor
covering.


2.Old car tires can be uesd to make shoes and
sandals.


3.The empty bottles can be uesed only one time.


Ss work ind., then in groups with


the brainstorming.


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the
stress – meaning and copy into
the notebook.


Ss work in groups to play game.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


4.People collect glass and send to the factories to
make new glass ware.


5.Farmers use house lold and garden waster to make
compost.


<b> 3 While-reading:</b>


Activity1:


T. asks Ss to read the text P.92 (text book) to check
their prediction.


Answer key:


1-F (…recycled..)
2-T



3-F (…thirty times…)
4-T


5-T
Activity 2:


T. runs through then asks Ss to read the text P.92
(text book) to answer the questions in pairs.


Answer key:


a.People cleaned and refilled empty milk bottles
b.The glass is broken up, melted and made into new
glassware.


c.The Oregon government made a new law that there
must be a deposit on all drink cans.The deposit is
returned when peolpe bring the cans back for
recycling .


d.Compost is make from household and garden
waste.


e.If we have a recycleing story to share ,we cans call
of fax the magazine at 5265456.


<b>4. Post -reading : </b>Task 2 P.93


T. asks Ss to work ind., then in pairs completing the
sentences to make a list of recycled things.



Answer key:


a.Car tires are recycled to make pipes and floor
coverings.


b.Milk bottles are cleaned and refilled.


c.Glass is broken up, melted and made into new
glassware.


d.Household and garden waste is made into compost


Ss work ind., then in pairs and in
groups read the text again and
check their prediction and correct
the false ones as well.


Ss read the text on P.92 (text book)
to answer the questions ind. and
then in pairs.


Ind., then in pairs and in groups,
Ss do part 2 P.93 (text book) in
Individually,then share their ideas


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:


<b>V.Homework</b>:



- Memorize vocab


- Read the text again and answer the questions.
- Prepare Unit 10 ( Lesson 4 : Write P.93-94)


<i>( Instructions on how to prepare the dry tea leaves to keep mosquitoes away )</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 63

<b>Unit 10: RECYCLING</b>


<i>Lesson 4:</i>

<i>Write (P.93-94)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write instructions on how
to prepare the dry tea leaves to keep mosquitoes away.


<b>I.Knowledges:</b>Adverbs of time and imperatives


<b> II.Skills</b>: writingand reading


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

<b> Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Pre-Writing:</b>


Pre-Teach



(to )soak (mime):
(to) wrap (mime)::
(to) scatter (mime):
(to) mesh (visual aid):


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports vocab on the
board-stress-meaning.


Check vovab<b> : </b>R.O.R


Gap Fill: ( Part 1-P.93 in text book)
T. runs through and then models.
Example: (0) soak


T. asks Ss to work ind.,then share in pairs and in
groups to complete the recycling instruction,
using the verbs in the box.


Answer keys:


1.use 2.mix
3.place 4.press
5.wrap 6. wait .
7. dry


T. asks Ss to read the completed passage as
model.



<b>2 While-Writing:</b>


T. asks Ss to look at the pictures and the given
cues below, runs through and models.


Example:


First, take the used tea leaves from the tea pot
T. asks Ss to make the instructions on how to
prepare the tea leaves make the instructions on
how to prepare the tea leaves using pictures and
key words in part 2 P. 94 (text book).


Answer:


First, take the used tea leaves from the tea pot.
Next ,scatter the tea leaves on a tray.


Then dry the leaves in the sun.


Finally, put the dry leaves in a pot for future use.


<b>3.Post- writing:</b>


T. asks Ss to swap their writing and correct each
other or report on the board and elicit the
correction from the Ss.


Then T. gives feedback in front of class.



Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the stress
– meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Ss work in groups to play game.


Ss complete the recycling
instruction,using the verbs in the box
ind., then in pairs and in groups.


Ss read the passage again.


Ss look at the pictures and then write
the instructions on how to prepare the
tea leaves,using pictures and key
words in part 2 P. 94 (text book) ind.,
then share with a friend.


Ss swap or report their writing on the
board to correct each other.


Then choose the best to copy down
on their notebook


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:


<b>V.Homework</b>:



- Memorize vocab.


- Complete the writing into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 10: Recycling-section Language Focus(P.95-97)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 64

<b>Unit 10: RECYCLING</b>


<i>Lesson 5:</i>

<i>Language Focus (P.95-97)</i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

<b>I.Knowledges:</b>Passive forms,It’s+(not)Adj+to-Vinf


<b> II.Skills</b>: speakingand writing


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking: </b>(within the duration of the class)


<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


1.PASSIVE FORMS:


T. call out form of the passive voice by giving an


example sentence or reuse the studied sentence at
the previous lesson.


Example:


a. People recycle car tires to make pipes and floor
coverings.


Car tires <i>are recycled</i> to make pipes and floor
coverings.


Form: S’ + be + V3/V-ed + by O’
Task 1: (P.95-textbook)


T. runs through and then models.


Example: a) The glass is broken up into small
piecies.


T. asks Ss to read a guide on how to recycle glass,
look at the instructions, rewrite them in the passive
form and put the pictures in the corrcet order ind.,
then share in pairs.


Answer keys:


a) The glass is broken into small pieces.


b)Then the glass is washed with a detergent liquit.
c)The glass piecies are dried completely.



d)They are mixed with certain special chemicals.
e)The mixture is melted until it becomes a liquit.
f)A long pipe is used. It is dipped into the liquit.
Then the liquit is blown into intended shaped.
Task 2: Gap fill (P.96-textbook)


T. runs through and models.
Example: (0) will-be started


T.asks Ss to complete the dialogue, using the
correct form of the verbs in the bracket.
Answer


1.will be shown
2.will –be built
3.will be finished
4.will-be made


2.ADJECTIVES FOLLOWED BY AN
INFINITIVE:


T. runs through and then models form the form.
Example: (0) It’s difficult to follow your direction.
Form It’s+(not)+Adj+to-Vinf


T.asks Ss to complete the dialogue using the words
in the box ind.,then in pairs.


Answer



1. It’s easy to understand.
2.It’s hard to believe.


3.It’s dangerous to go near the stove.
4.It’s important to wait for five minutes.


T. asks Ss to work in pairs with the dialogue


Ss call out the form of Passive Voice
using the example.


Ss look at the board.


Ind., then share in pairs, Ss read a
guide on how to recycle glass, look
at the instructions, then rewrite them
in the passive form and put the
pictures in the corrcet order .


Ss copy into the notebook.


Ss complete the dialogue, using the
correct form of the verbs in the
bracket ind., then in pairs.Then Ss
work in pairs with the completed
dialogue.


Ss look at the example sentence for
form.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


completing.


3.ADJECTIVES FOLLOWED BY A NOUN
CLAUSE:


Example:


Your mother and I are delighted that you passed
your English exam.


Form: S+(not)+be+Adj+that +SV…


T.asks Ss to complete the letter using the correct
forms of the verb “be” and the adjectives in the
box.


Answer


1.Aunt Mai was happy that you remember her..
2.I am relieved that your mother is feeling better.
3.Grandfather is afraid that the day is wrong.
4.Are you sure that you’re……?


T. asks Ss to read the letter again.


the words in the box.



Ss work in pairs with the completed
dialogue.


Ind.,then in pairs, Ss to work in pairs
complete the letter, using”It’s+(not)
+Adj+ a noun clause” and the words
in the box.


Ss copy into the notebook.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:


<b>V. Homework</b>:


- Revise The Passive Form and Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause.
- Prepare Unit 11: Traveling around VietNam.(section Getting started+Listen and read)


<i>(Make and respond to Formal Requests with Would you mind“</i> <i>…?)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 65

<b>Unit 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIETNAM</b>


<i>Lesson 1:</i>

<i>Getting started-Listen and Read (P.99-100)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand how to make
and respond to Formal Requests.


<b>I.Knowledges:</b>Would you ming+Ving/Would you mind+if+ Simple Past.



<b> II.Skills</b>: Reading and speaking


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking: </b>Rewrite the following sentences:
1.They dry the glass completely.


- The glass……… ………..


2.To understand the question is difficult.
- It’s………....


<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Revision: </b>Getting Started (P.98)


T. asks Ss to match the pictures with their names.
Answer


a) Ngo Mon(Gate)
b)Nha Rong Habor


c)The Temple of Literature
d)Ha Long Bay


<b>2.Presentation</b>



Activity 1


T asks Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs.
Activity 1


T. asks Ss to do part 2 P.99(in textbook) to check
comprehension ind.,then share in pairs and in groups.
Answer


1.T
2.T




Ss match the pictures with their
names.


Ind.,then share in pairs and in
groups, Ss do part 2 P.99(in
textbook) to check


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


4.T
6.T


7.F(Rice,corn and sugar canes…)
Model sentences



Would you mind sitting in the front seat?
Would you mind if I took a photo?


Form


Would you mind V-ing …?


Would you mind +if+S+V2/Ved…?


<b>3.Practice</b>


T.asks Ss to use “Would you mind+Ving or Would
you mind +if+S+V2/Ved…? to make the following
requests more polite in pairs.


*Can I turn on the T.V?


*Can you sing that song one more?


*Can you use your computer for one hour?
*Can you correct the composition for me?
Example Can I turn on the T.V?


 Would you mind if I turned on the T.V?
Answer


Would you mind singing that song one more?


Would you mind using your computer for one hour?
Would you mind correcting the composition for me?



<b>4.Further Practice </b>Language focus 3 P.109
Example a)Would you mind moving your car?
T.asks Ss to use “Would you mind+Ving or Would
you mind +if+S+V2/Ved…? to make the following
requests in pairs.


Answer


Would you mind putting out your cigarrette?
Would you mind getting me some coffee?
Would you mind waiting a moment?


Ss use “Would you mind+Ving or
Would you mind +if+S+V2/Ved…?
to make the following requests
more polite in pairs.


Ss use “Would you mind+Ving or
Would you mind+if+S+V2/Ved…?
to make the following requests in
open-closed pairs.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b> (involved)


<b>V. Homework</b>:


- Revise how to make and respond to Formal Requests with “Would you mind…?
- Complete Language focus 3 P.109 into the notebook.



- Prepare Unit 11: Traveling around VietNam.(section speak and Listen –P.99-100)


<i>(Would you mind…..?)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 66

<b>Unit 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIETNAM</b>


<i>Lesson 2:</i>

<i>Speak and Listen (P.99-100)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to practice speaking using
requests and offers and listen to the dialogue for getting information
about position of the places on the map.


<b>I.Knowledges:</b>Would/Do you ming+Ving ; Would/do you mind+if+ Simple Past.


<b> II.Skills</b>: Listenig and speaking


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking: </b>Rewrite the following sentences:
a)Can I turn off the T.V?


-Would………?
b)Can you close the door?


-Would………?



<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Pre-Speaking</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


P.100-101(textbook)


Request <sub>P</sub> Reply




*Do you mind
<i>closing</i> the door?
*Would you mind
<i>opening</i> the
window?


*Do you mind if I
<i>take</i> a photo?


*Would you mind if
I <i>took</i> a photo?


No, I don’t
mind.
No, of
course not.



Not at all.
Please do.


Please go
ahead.


I’m sorry.I
can’t.
I’m sorry,


that’s
imposible.
I’d better you


didn’t.
I’d rather you


didn’t.


<b>2.While-Speaking </b>Mapped Dialogue


A TOURIST A TOURIST GUIDER


Would/if/you/a/question? Not at all.


I/visit/a market? I/suggest/go/TB
market?


Do/suggest/one?



That/sound/interesting.Thanks. You/welcome.
T.runs through, and then elicits questions and the
answers.


T.models,then asks Ss to work in open-closed pairs.
Example Exchange


Tourist: <i>Would you mind if I asked you a question?</i>
T.G: <i>Not at all.</i>


Tourist: <i>I want to visit a market.Do you mind </i>
<i>suggesting one?</i>


T.Gr: <i>I suggest going to Thai Binh market.</i>


Tourist: <i>That sounds interesting.Thanks.</i>


TG: <i> You re welcome.</i>’


<b>3.Post-Speaking </b>Listening<b> </b>


T. has Ss listen and match the places in the box with
their correct positions on the map.


Answer
a)Restaurant
b)Hotel
c)Bus station
d)Pagoda


e)Temple


Ss listen to T’s explanation.


T. runs through – elicits the
questions and the answers.Then
models- pairwork.


Ss listen and match the places
with correct position on the map.


<b>IV.Consolidation </b> Language Focus 4 (P.110-textbook)


<b>V. Homework</b>:


- Revise how to make and respond to Formal Requests with “Would you mind…?
- Complete Language focus 4 P.110 into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 11: Traveling around VietNam.(section Read –P.99-100)


<i>(Ideas and detilsl of the advertisements)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 67

<b>Unit 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIETNAM</b>


<i>Lesson 3:Read</i>

<i> (P.102-105)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>



By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the main ideas and details of the
advertisements.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

<b>II.Skills</b>:Reading andspeaking<b> </b>
<b>B.Procedures</b>:


<b>I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> </b> <b> II.Checking:</b>Language Focus 4 (P.110-textbook)


<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1 Revision: </b>Matching


T. asks Ss to match the word in the colum A with the
word in the colum B (with answer keys)


<b> A B</b>


Halong bay Flowery city
Nha Trang Mountainous city
SaPa Seaside city


Da Lat World heritage site


<b>2.Pre-Reading:</b>



Pre-Teach


oceanic institute (picture)
offshore island (picture)
water fall (picture)


tribal village (example/explanation)
heritage site (example)


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab<b> : </b>What and where


Open- Prediction


T. aks Ss to predict the topics mentioned in the
brochures about the resorts ind.,then share in pairs and
in groups(with answer keys)


N Trang D.Lat Sapa HLBay


Caves <b><sub>P</sub></b>


Flights to HN <b><sub>P</sub></b>


Hotel <b><sub>P</sub></b> <b><sub>P</sub></b> <b><sub>P</sub></b> <b><sub>P</sub></b>


Local transport <b><sub>P</sub></b> <b><sub>P</sub></b> <b><sub>P</sub></b> <b><sub>P</sub></b>


Mini hotel <b><sub>P</sub></b>



Mountain slopes <b><sub>P</sub></b>
Railway <b><sub>P</sub></b>


Resstaurants


Sand beaches <b><sub>P</sub></b>


Tourist attractions <b><sub>P</sub></b> <b><sub>P</sub></b> <b><sub>P</sub></b> <b><sub>P</sub></b>
Types of food


Villages <b><sub>P</sub></b>


Watrefalls <b><sub>P</sub></b>


World heritage <b><sub>P</sub></b>


<b>3 While-Reading:</b>


T. asks Ss to read the text P.102-103 (in textbook) to
check their prediction.


<b>4. Post -Reading :</b>


T. asks Ss to do part 2 P.105 (text book) to practice
speaking in pairs.


Example Exchange


S1: Where should Andrew go?


S2: Sapa.


S1 : Why should He go there?


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat
ind.-in chorus,then answer about the
stress – meaning and copy into
the notebook.


Ss work in groups to predict the
topics mentioned in the
brochures about the resorts.


Ss read the text P.102-103 (text
book) to check their prediction
ind.,then in pairs and in groups


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


S2: He likes mountain.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:


<b>V.Homework</b>:


- Memorize vocab


- Read the text again for details and ideas



- Prepare Unit 11: Traveling around VietNam.(Write-P.105-107)
(Writing a narrative)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 68

<b>Unit 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIETNAM</b>


<i>Lesson 4:Write</i>

<i> (P.105-107)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b> By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write a narrative
<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Simple Past


<b>II.Skills</b>: Writing and Reading


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b>I.Settlement: </b>Greeting and check the attendances


<b> II.Checking: </b>Read the text again and answer the questions?
<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1. Revision:</b>


T. asks Ss to give the past form of the following
verbs(with answer keys)


Have - … Begin - …
Decide - … Appear - …


Climb - … Fall - …
Be - … Drop - …
Answer


Have - had Begin - began
Decide - decided Appear - Appeared
Climb - climbed Fall - Fell
Be - was/were Drop - Dropped


<b>2 Pre-Writing:</b>


Pre-teach


(to) paddle (picture)
(to) rescued ( traslation)
(to) overturn (picture)
(to) lean over (picture)


T.elicits-modelsT. asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports vocab on the
board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab<b> : </b>R.O.R


T.asks Ss to read the text to put the sentences
below in the correct chronological order to
complete the story.


Keys: c – a – g – d – f – b - e



a.The canoe moved up and down the water.
b.A boat appeared and rescued them.


c.The wind started to blow and the rain became
heavier.


d.She leaned over and tried to pick it up.
e.The family was lucky.


f.The canoe overturned and overturned and


everyone fell into the deep and dangerous water.
g.Shannon dropped her paddle.


<b>3 While-Writing:</b>


Activity 1 T.asks Ss to put the pictures in the


Ss work ind. to give the past form of
the following verbs


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the


stress – meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Ss work in groups to play game.



Ss work ind. to read the text to put
the sentences below in the correct
chronological order to complete the
story.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


correct chronological order ind. then in pairs and
in groups.


Keys: D , B , E , H , F , C , G


Activity 2 T. asks Ss to practice writing a story
,using pictures on P 106 (text book).


Answer


d, She had a math exam on Friday and she got up
late.


b,She realized her alarm clock did not go off.
e, As she was leaving home , it started to rain
heavily.


h, Uyen tries to run as fast as she could.


a, Suddenly she stumbed against a rock and fell.
f, Her school bag went into a pool and everything


got wet.



c, Strangely , the rain stopped as she got to her
classroom.


g, Luckly ,Uyen had got enough time to finist her
exam.


<b>4. Post -Reading :</b>


Activity1 Correction


T. asks Ss to change the writing and correct for
each other each other then T corrects


Activity 2 Retelling the story


T. asks Ss to retell the story ind. in front of the
class.


the correct chronological order


Ss work in ind.,then in pairs ,in
groups to practice writing a story
,using pictures on P 106 (text book)


Ss work in pairs to correct the story
for each other.


Ss work ind. to retell story



<b>IV.Consolidation</b>(involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:


- Complete th story into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 11:Traveling around VietNam.(Languge focus-P.108-109)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 69

<b>Unit 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIETNAM</b>


<i>Lesson 5:Language focus</i>

<i> (P.108-109)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to revise some studied points.
<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Would /Do you mind if...?


Would / Do you mind if + V-ing..?


Past participle and Present participles as adjectives.etc.
<b> II.Skills</b>: Writing<b> </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement </b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking:</b> (Not check)
<b>III.New lesson:</b>



<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1. -</b>” <b>ED AND -ING PARTICIPLES</b>” ” ”


a)”- ing”participles :


Example The boy <i>sitting</i> under the tree is Ba .
Form: V-ing


T. asks Ss to look at the people in the school yard at
Quang Trung school and telling who each person is
using Present participles.


Answer


The man walking up the stairs is Mr.Quang.
The woman carrying a bag is Miss Lien.


Listen and look at the people in
the schoolyard at QT school to say
who each person is ind., in groups


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


The boy standing next to Miss Lien is Nam .
The boy sitting under the tree is Ba .


The girl standing by the table is Lan .


The girl playing chess are Nga on the right and Hoa
on the left.



b)”-ed ”participles :


Example The old lamp made in China is 5 dollars.
Form V3/V-ed


T. has Ss look at the stall and describe the goods for
sale using past participles of the verbs in the box.
Answer


The green pained bex is one dollar.
The doll dressed in pink is two dollars.


The flowers wrapped in yellow paper are 1dollar.
The toys kept in a cardboard box are ten dollars.
Asks Ss to look at the stall to describe the goods for
sales , using the past participles of the verbs in the
box following example


<b>2.DO/WOULD YOU MINDV-ING</b>..?


T.asks Ss to recall Requests with “Do/Would…?”
and then make and respond to requesrs.


Answer


-Would you mind moving the car ?
No, of course not.


-Would you mind putting out your cigarette?


No, of course not.


-Would you mind getting me some coffee?
I’m sory, I’m very bussy right now.


-Would you mind waiting a moment?
I’m sory, I can’t. I’m already late for work.


<b>3.WOULD /DO YOU MIND IF...?</b>


T. asks Ss to ask questions and give suitable
respones, using the information on P.100 following
example exchange in pairs.


Example Exchange


a, A: Do you mind if I sit down?
B: Please do.


b, A: Would you mind if I smoked ?
B: I’d rather you didn’t.


Answer


c)Do you mind if I postpone our meeting?
-Please do.


d)Do you mind if I turn off the stereo?
-Not at all.



e)Would you mind if I turned on the air-conditioner?
-I’d rather you didn’t.


f)Do you mind if I watch T.V while eating lunch?
-No, of course not.


describe the goods for sales ,
using the past participles of the
verbs in the box


In pairs, Ss make requests and
give suitable respones with
“Would/Do you mind+V-ing…?”


In pairs, Ss make requests and
and give suitable respones with
“Would/Do you mind if I…”


<b> IV Consolidation:</b>
<b> V.Homework</b>:


- Revise some studied knowledge for the Revision class.


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 70


<b>REVISION</b>




<b> A.OBJECTIVES</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to revise some knowledge they have learnt
from unit 9 -11for One-Period Test.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

<b> II.Skills:</b>writing


<b> B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking:</b> No check
<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


PASSIVE FORMS:
Example I write a letter


A letter is written by me
Form Be+ V3/V-ed


<i>Rewrite these sentences </i>


T. asks Ss to rewrite these sentences.


1.Keeping the environment clean is very important.
-It’s …



2.He receives a letter
-A letter...


3My father planed this tree yesteday.
-This tree...


4.Today people cut down many trees to make paper.
-Many trees…


<b>-</b>Recalls the fofm ,the use, the meaning by asking
some questions.


Answer


1.It’s important to keep the environment clean
2 A letter is received by him.


3. This tree was planted yesterdayby him.
4. Many trees aerbcut down to make paper.
Making request


*MAKING REQUESTS AND OFFERS:


<i>-Can/Could you.…?</i>
<i>-Will/ Would you……?</i>


*Making offers:


<i> Would you like …?</i>



Example Can/Could you give me a book?


Will/ Would you answer my question?
Would you like some tea?


<b> </b>Would you mind if I opened the door?


<b> </b>Would you mind singing a song ?


<i>Choose the best answer</i>


T. asks Ss to choose the best answer ind.
1 Do you mind if I ( open/ opened) the door?


2 Tim ( never saw/ has never seen) rice paddies before
3 Would you mind ( doing /did) this work?


Answer
1 open


2 has never seen
3 doing


4 thirty-minute


ED” AND ”-ING” PARTICIPLES


T.asks Ss to use “-ed” or”-ing’’participles to combine
these sentensces.



1 The boys are in the volunteer group . They are
planting trees on the hill


2.The house belongs to my uncle . It’s built of wood.
3.The girl is my daughter .She is playing in the front
yard.


Answer


Ss listen to and give examples.


Ss work ind.,then share in pairs
and to rewrite these sentences.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs for the
multiple choice.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


1 The boys planting trees on the hill are in the
volunteer group


2. The house built of wood belongs to my uncle.
3. The girl playing in the front yard is my daughter.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:(involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:



-Revise all studied knowledge for the next revision period.


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 71

<b>ONE-PERIOD TEST</b>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to be tested some studied knowledge for grade.
<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Tenses,Requests…


<b>II.Skills</b>:Writing<b> </b>
<b>B.Procedures</b>:


<b> I</b>.<b>Settlement</b> : Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Handing out the papers:</b>


<b>III.Test:</b>


Answer


I.Choose a,b,c or d complete the following sentences:(2 marks)
1.They are looking forward to………her mother.


a. see b.saw c.seeing d. seen
2Cool the burns immediately so as to………the tissue damage.



a.ease b.releive c. minimize d.maximize
3. Would you mind if I……….?


a. smoking b. smoking c. smoked d. will smoke
4. People use first-aid…….ease the victim’s paint and anxiety.


a. so that b. in order to c. so as not to d.in order that
5. Motorbikes ______ in China are cheap.


a. make b. made c. makes d. making
6. The girl sitting ……….my father and Michael is my little sister.


a. on b. next c. between d. in
II.Rewrite the sentences, beginning with the words given:(2 marks)
1. They send two million books to America every year.


-Two million………
2 .Could you wait a moment, please ?


-Would…… ……… ………. .. ...?
3. It’s easy to answer these questions.


-To answer……… …. .
4. I have never seen that film before.


-It’s the first time……… ………… …...
III.Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form:(3marks)


Nam (be) ..<i>1</i>.. my pen pal. He’s 14 years old. He now (live) ..<i>2</i>.. in Hue. Yesterday, I
(receive) ..<i>3</i>.. letter. He said that he usually (have)…<i>4</i>… cook rice for breakfast and for


lunch. He (eat)..<i>5</i>… the food his mother…<i>6</i>...(cook). Her food (be)…<i>7</i>…the best. Last
week, I (write)…<i>8</i>... to him. I (introduce) …<i>9</i>…myself and (send)…<i>10</i>… him a
photograph of my family.


IV.Choose the one word or phrase that would not be appropriate: :(1mark)
1. Would you mind if I sit here ?-No, of course not.


A B C D
2. They played for the school team since last year.
A B C D


3.Old car tires can be recycle to make pipes and floor coverings.
A B C D


4. We didn’t wanted to go to the beach.
A B C D


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

garden waste to make compost. Compost is a wonderful natural fertilizer. It helps plants
grow.


1….. ..Farmers have recycled their waste for thousand of years.
2……They don’t use the dung for fertilizing their fields.


3…… Compost is made from dung.


4…… Compost is a wonderful natural fertilizer.


<b>IV.Handing in the papers</b>
<b>V.Homework</b>



<b> -</b>Revise all tested points for Test-Correction period.


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 72

<b>TEST CORRECTION</b>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to be corrected their papers.
<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Tenses,Requests…


<b>II.Skills</b>:Writing and speaking<b> </b>
<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I</b>.<b>Settlement</b> : Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Handing out the marked papers:</b>
<b> III.Correction</b>:


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


I.Choose a,b,c or d complete the following sentences:
T. asks Ss to scan the multiple choice again and recall
the answer for the sentences ind.


1.c.seeing
2.c. minimize



3.c. smoked
4.b. in order to


5. b. made
6c. between


II.Rewrite the sentences, beginning with the words
given:


T. asks Ss to scan the task again and recall the answer
for the sentences ind and then in pairs.


1.Two million books are sent to America every year.
2.Would you wait a moment?


3.To answer these questions is easy.
4.It’s the first time I have seen that film.


III.Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form:
T. asks Ss to scan the task again and recall the correct
form of the verbs ind. and then in pairs.


1.is 6.cooks
2.lives 7.is
3.received 8.wrote
4.had 9.introduced
5.eats 10.sent


IV.Choose the one word or phrase that would not be
appropriate:



T. asks Ss to scan the task again and choose the one
word or phrase that would not be appropriate ind. and
then in pairs.


1.A
2.B
3.C
4.B


V.Read the passage then decide whether the
statements are True or false:(2marks)


T.asks Ss to scan the passage then decide whether the
statements are True or false.


Ss work ind., scanning the
multiple choice again and recall
the answer for the sentences.


Ind and then in pairs, Ss rewrite
the sentences.


Ind and then in pairs, Ss put the
verbs in suitable forms and the
reasons for their choice.


Ss work ind. with for words or
phrases that would not be
appropriate:



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


1.T
2.F
3.F
4.T


<b>IV.Mark Reporting</b>
<b>V.Homework</b>


-Memorize all studied points


-Prepare Unit 12: A vacation abroad(getting stared-Listen and read P.111-113)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 73

<b>Unit12:A VACATION ABOARD</b>



<i>Lesson1:Getting Started -Listen and Read(P.111-113)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to make plans, giving and
responding to the invitations .


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Would you like to ...?


Yes, I 'd love to / Yes,I'd love to but ....



<b> II.Skills:</b> Reading and Speaking <b> II.Skills:</b>writing


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the attendances


<b> II.Checking: (</b>No checking)


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Revision:</b>


T. asks Ss to match the picture with names of the
countries with appropriate pictures/flags on P. 111ind.
Answer:


a.The United States of America
b. Australia.


c. Thailand
a. Britain
b. Canada
c. Japan


<b>2.Presentation:</b>


Activity1: Presentation dialogue.


T.asks Ss to listen to the dialogue and then practice the


dialogue with their partners.


Task 1(P.113) Complete Mrs Quyen’s schedule


T. asks Ss to read the dialogue again to complete
Mrs.Quyen's schedule.


Date Mon 25 Tues 26 Wed 27 Thur 28


S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E


<i>coming to</i>
<i>San</i>
<i>Francisco</i>


<i>going out</i> <i>having</i>
<i>dinner</i>
<i>with the</i>


<i>Smiths</i>


<i>leaving</i>
<i>San</i>


<i>Francisco</i>


Task 2 Answer the questions(P.113)


T.runs through and then asks Ss to work in pairs read
the dialogue again and answer the questions.


Answer


a.No,they won't.They will stay at a hotel


b.No,he won't .He will have a business meeting in the
evening


c. Mrs .Smith will pick her up at her hotel
Model sentences


<i>Invitations:</i> Would you like to....


<i>Accepting invitations: </i>Yes, I' d love to


<i>Declining invitations: </i>That 's very kind of you ,but....
T.elicits the model sentences-T.models-asks Ss to


Ss work in groups to match the
picture wiht names of the
countries/flags on P. 111.


Ss listen and practice the
dialogue, then complete


Mrs.Quyen's schedule ind.,then
in pairs.


Ss read the dialogue again for
answering and answering
questions ind., in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

<b>chral-ind.-Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


repeat in choral-ind.-and then T.copies on the
board-and does the concept check.


<b>3 Practice </b>Mapped Dialogue


<i> LAN MARY</i>


Hello /Mary Hello/ nice/meet/you
I/ stay/ here Monday /Friday Would /you/come


/stay/ / us?
Kind/you/but/accommodation


inclued/ticketprice Then/you/come/dinner
/tonight?


/love


T.runs through, and then elicits questions and the
answers.



T.models,then asks Ss to work in open-closed pairs.


Example Exchange:
Lan: Hello,Marry.


Marry: Hello LAn .nice to meet you.


Lan: I'm staying here from Monday to Friday.
Marry: Would you like to come to stay with us ?
Lan : That's very kind of you , but my


accommodation is inclued in the ticket price.
Marry: Then you must come over for dinner tonight
Lan: Yes, I'd love to.


copy into the notebook-answer
T’s questions about concept
check.


Ss answer-listen to T. And then
work in open-closed pairs.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:-Would you like to ...?


Yes, I 'd love to./Yes,I'd love to but….


<b>V.Homework</b>:


-Revise giving and responding to the invitations with “Would you like to ...?“.


-Prepare Unit 12: A Vacation Abroad ''section Speak and Listen-P.113-115"


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 74

<b>Unit12: A VACATION ABOARD</b>



<i>Lesson2:Speak and Listen (P.113-115)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to make their own plans on
the itineracy and listen for details about the weather reprts.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>How to record a travel ....


<b> II.Skills:</b> Speaking and Listening


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the attendances


<b> II.Checking: </b>Read the dialogue on P.111 again and answer the questions?


<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1 Pre-Speaking:</b>


Pre-Teach:



Snowy (picture)
Windy (translation)
Humid (translation)
Minus Degree (exmple)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports vocab on the
board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab Slap the board


Activity1 T. asks Ss to get information on P114 (text
book) to fill in the table on P 113 ind.,then in pairs
and in groups.


Answer:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


Depart Los Angeles : <i>Flight</i> <i>8.35 at 10.00 on Mon</i>


Arrive Bonston : <i>At 4.00</i>


Accommodation: <i>Atlantic hotel</i>


Sightseeing : <i>Museums and Art Galleries</i>


Activity2 T. presents the dialogue.A: Where shall we
stay?



B: Revere Hotel.It’s an excellent hotel.
A: What time should we leave Los Angeles?
B:At 10.00 A.M.


A:What should we go for sightseeing?
B:Paul’s reverie house.


T. asks Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs.


<b>2.While-Speaking.</b>


T. asks Ss to prctice speaking using their own
information from the table activities 1 in pairs.


<b>4 Post-Speaking : </b>Listening


T. asks Ss to listen the tape to complete the table
using the given words in the box ind.,then in pairs
and in groups.


Answer


city weather temperature
low high


<i>Tokyo</i>
<i>London </i>
<i>Bangkok</i>
<i>Paris</i>



<i>dry,windy</i>
<i>humid,cold</i>
<i>warm,dry</i>
<i>cool, dry</i>


<i>15</i>
<i>-3</i>
<i>24</i>
<i>10</i>


<i>22</i>
<i>7</i>
<i>32</i>
<i>16</i>


Listen and practice the dialogue,
then complete Mrs.Quyen's
schedule in pairs


Work ind., in groups to get


information on P114 (text book) to
fill in the table on P 113


Listen to the dia then practice the
dialogue


Work in pairs to use their own
informationfrom the table



activities 1 to practice the dialogue


Ss listen to the tape to complete
the table in pairs


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:


<b>V.Homework</b>:


-Revise how to record a travel


-Prepare Unit 12: A Vacation Abroad ''section read-P.116-117"


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 75

<b>Unit12: A VACATION ABOARD</b>



<i>Lesson3:Read(P.116-117)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the main ideas
and details about Mrs.Quyen 's tour to the United State.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Past progressive with ''when and while ''


<b> II.Skills:</b> Speaking and Listening


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:



<b> I.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the attendances


<b> II.Checking: </b>
<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1 Revision: </b>Matching


T. asksSs to match the word in the colum A with the
word in the colum B.


A B


1 Hawaii a.The massive portraits of four
American presidents


2 New York b.The windy city
3. Chicago c.Famous prison
4.Mount Rushmore d. beautiful beaches
5.San francisco e.Statue of liberty


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


Keys: 1 - d ; 2 - e ; 3 - b ; 4 - a ; 5 - c


<b>2.Pre-reading:</b>


Pre-Teach:


volcano (translation)


lava (translation)
wharf ( picture)
wine-growing area explanation)
(to) carve (translation)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab: Slap the board


Open Prediction (Task 1 P117 -text book)


T. asks Ss to guess and fill in the table P 117 ind.,then in
pairs.


Answer keys:


PLACE What she saw and did?
1 Hawaii


2 New york
3. Chicago
4.M.Rushmore
5.San Francisco


<i>went swimming,visited Kilauea </i>
<i>Volcano. </i>


<i>went shopping,buoght lots of </i>
<i>souvernirs. </i>



<i>saw lake Michigan.</i>


<i>saw the heads of 4 American </i>
<i>presidents.</i>


<i>visited fisherman s whalf, the </i>’


<i>NaPa valley wine -growingnarea </i>
<i>and the Alcatraz prison.</i>


<b>3.While -Reading.</b>


T. asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction
,then answer the questions.


Answer keys


<b>a.</b> She went there by plane.


<b>b.</b> She went the prison on the island of Alcatraz.


<b>c.</b> People can see Mount Rushmore from more than
100 km away.


<b>d.</b> It's also called ''The windy city".


<b>e.</b> She went shopping .


<b>4 Post-Reading </b>



T. asks Ss to do exercise 3 P.71 in the workbook


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat
ind.-in chorus,then answer about the
stress – meaning and copy
into the notebook.


Ss work in groups to guess and
fill in the table P 117.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs
reading the text and check
their prediction ,then answer
the questions


Ss work ind. with the exercise
3 P.71 in the workbook.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:


<b>V.Homework</b>:


<b>-</b> Memorize vocab


<b>-</b> Read the text again for understand the main ideas and details.


- Prepare Unit 12: A Vacation Abroad ''section Write P.upload.123doc.net"



<i><b> (Progressive tenses with ''Always '')</b></i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 76

<b>Unit12:A VACATION ABOARD</b>



<i>Lesson4:Write(P.upload.123doc.net)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write a postcard.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Progressive tenses with ''Always ''


<b> II.Skills:</b> Writing


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the attendances


<b> II.Checking: </b>Read the dialogue on P.116 again and answer the questions?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Revision: </b>Chain Game


T. asksSs to play chain game in groups of four or five.
Exmple Exchange


S1: I saw museums in HCM city.



S2: I saw museums and libraries in HCM city.
S1: I saw…..


<b>2.Pre-writing:</b>


Activity1 T. asks Ss to complete the postcard Mrs
Quyen sent from the USA ind.,then in pairs and in
groups (P.upload.123doc.net -Text book)


Answer keys


1.in 6. lovely /nice
2.people 7. bought
3.weather 8. for


4.visited 9. heaviness
5.her 10. soon


T. asks Ss to complete the table ind.,then in pairs.


Place <i>Hanoi</i>


How you feel about the people <i>friendly, hospitable…</i>


What the weather is like <i>Hot, warm…</i>


Who you meet/see <i>old friend, </i>
<i>relatives…</i>


What you see <i>museums,parks…</i>



What you buy <i>Books, souvenirs…</i>


Exchange Exchange:
S1: What did you see in HCM city ?
S2: I saw museums.


…..


<b>3.While -Writing</b>


T. asks Ss to practice writing a post card , using


information from the activity 2 ind.,then share in pairs.
Suggesting Postcard


Dear Hai,


I'm having a really good time in HN , the capital of
VN .The people are hospitable and helpful and the
weather has been wonderful : cool and sunny


In HN , I visited some of my old friends : Tom and
sally . It was very nice to see them . We visited the
history museum and some art galleries in Hang bai
street and had lunch togerther at a vegetarian
restaurant


I bough a lot of souvernirs and postcards for you and
other friends



See you soon
With love


<i>Mary</i>


<b>4.Post reading: </b>Correction


T. asks Ss to do exercise 3 P.71 in the workbook.


Ss work in groups with the
game.


Ss work in pairs to complete
the table.


Ss work ind. practicing writing
a post card , using information
from the activity 2


Ss work ind. with exercise 3
P.71 in the workbook.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:


<b>V.Homework</b>:


-Complete the postcard into the notebook.


-Prepare Unit 12: A Vacation Abroad ''section Languege focus P.119-120"



<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

<i>Lesson5:Languge Focus(P.119-120</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use Past progressive
tense , and progressive tenses .


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Past Progressive Tense and Progressive tenses with ''Always ''


<b> II.Skills: </b>Speaking andWriting


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the attendances


<b> II.Checking: </b>(No checking)


<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Past progressive tense</b> <b>:</b>


T.gives the situation , turns out the form of tense.
Example At 3 oclock yesterday morning ,I was
sleeping .


Form:



S+ was/were + V-ing.


Use: talking about an action happening in definite
point of time in the past.


<b>2.Past progressive tense with when or while</b>“ ” “ ”


<b>Example :</b>


Example Last night when I was watching TV , she
came to my house.


T asks Ss to look at the pictures say what each
people was doing at 8 o clock last night following
eample exchange.


Example


a. Ba was taking a showert at 8 o clock last night .
Task 1T. asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs.


Answer keys:


b.Hoa was eating at 8 o clock last night .


<b>c.</b>Bao was reading book at 8 o clock last night .
d<b>.</b>Nga was doing her home work at 8 o clock last


night .



e.Na was joging at 8 o clock last night .
f.Lan was talkingat 8 o clock last night .
Task 2


T.<b> a</b>sks Ss to look at the pictures to match the half
–sentences in column A to those in column B then
write the full sentences following example.


Exchange :


<b>a- C </b>The Le family was sleeping when the
mailman came


Answer keys:


A B


<b>b.</b>While Hoa was eating <b>A.</b>when the plane got to
Hanoi


c.When Nam won the


race <b>B </b>homewhen Tuan arrived
d<b>.</b> Mrs Thoa was


cooking <b>C </b>camewhen the mailman
e.WhenLan arrived at


school <b>D</b>sounding theschooldrum was


f. It was raining <b>E </b>the crowd was cheering


a.TheLe family was


sleeping <b>F </b>the phone rang.


key b- F c-E d- B e- D f- A
b<b>.</b>While Hoa was eating the phone rang


Ss listen and give the example
sentences and elicit the copy down
the form.


Ss work ind. to say what each people
was doing at 8 o clock last night
following example exchange


Ba was taking a showert at 8 o clock
last night .


.


Ss work ind.to look at the pictures to
match the half –sentences in


column A to those in column B then
write the full sentences


following example exchange :



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


c. When Nam won the race , the crowd was
cheering


d<b>. </b>Mrs Thoa was cooking when Tuan arrived home
e. When Lan arrived at school , the schooldrum
was sounding


f. It was raining when the plane got to Hanoi.


<b>3.Progressive Tences with Always</b>“ ”
Example


a) Bao is always forgeting his homework.


T. asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs writing what
the people are always doing.


Answer


b)Mrs Nga is always losing her umbrella.


c)Mr and Mirs Thanh are always missing the bus.
d)Nam is always watching T.V.


e)Na is always talking on the phone.
f)Liem is always going out.


Ss work ind. to write what the


people are always doing ind.,then in
pairs.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:


The form and more examples.


<b>V.Homework</b>:


- Complete all the tasks into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 1 ‘’Getting started –Listen and read "


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 78

<b>UNIT 13:FESTIVALS</b>



<i>Lesson1:Getting Started,Listen and read(P.121-122)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use Passive form,
compound words and reported speech.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Passive form, compound words and reported speech.


<b> II.Skills: </b>Speaking and Writing


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:



<b> I.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the attendances


<b> II.Checking: </b>Past Progressive tenses.


<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Revision:</b>Getting started (P.121)


T. asks Ss to work in pairs for where should these people go
on their visits to Vietnam.


<b>2.Presentation</b>


Pre-Teach
water-fetching
fire-making
rice-cooking
(to)yell
(to) make
(to)make a fire
(to)award the price


T. asks Ss to workind.,then share in pairs and in groups with
the good sentences.


<b>3.Practice</b>


Activity1



T. asks Ss to practice the dialogue with the dialogue.(P.112)
Activity2


T.asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs and ingroups with the
True (T),false(F) statements.


Answer


a.F(One tea member…)


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s
model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about
the stress – meaning and
copy into the notebook.


Ss work in pairs with the
dialogue.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


b.F(…one bottle…
c.T


d.F(Pieces of bamboo…)
e.F(The judge…)


f.T



Activity3


T.asks Ss to list activities people do in the rice-cooking
festival.


<b>Water-fetching</b>


*run to the river
*each runner must
take a bottle


<b>Fire-making</b>


*make a fire in
traditional way
*make a fire by
rubbing pieces of
bamboo


<b>Rice-cooking</b>


*each team has 6
participants


*separate the rice
from the husk


<b>3.Further Practice</b>


Complete the following sentences



1.fire /make /without / matches / lighters
2.rice / separate / husk


3.pieces / wood / use / make the fire
4.water / take / river


5.grand prize / give / winners


T. asks Ss to workind.,then share in pairs and in groups with
the good sentences.


Answer


1.Fire is made without matches or lighters.
2.Rice is separated from the husk.


3.Pieces of wood are used to make the fire.
4.Water is taken from the river.


5.Grand prize is given to the winners.


text and check the
statements True(T) or
False(F)


Ss work ind.,then in pairs
and in groups and make a
list activities people do in
the rice-cooking festival.



Ss workind.,then share in
pairs and in groups with
the good sentences.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:


<b>V.Homework</b>:


- Complete all the tasks into the notebook.


- Read the dialogue for details and answer the questions.
- Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 2 ‘Speak and listenP.123-124 "


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 79

<b>UNIT 13:FESTIVALS</b>



<i>Lesson 2: Speak and Listen(P.123-124)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the preparation.
<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Prepare for a festival


<b> II.Skills: </b>Speaking and listening


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:



<b> I.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the attendances


<b> II.Checking: </b>Read the text and answer the questions?


<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Revision: </b>Brainstorming


New clothes
Preparation for Tet


Tidying the house


<b>2.Pre-Speaking</b>


Pre-Teach


(to) decorate (picture/situation)
marigold (n) (picture)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


pomegranate (n) (picture)
peach blossoms (n) (picture)


T.elicits the model sentences-T.models-asks Ss to
repeat in choral-ind.-and then T.copies on the
board-and does the concept check.



Check vocab R.O.R


<i>Ordering statements</i>


T. asks Ss to work in pairs to order the statements
in the right order(Speak 1P.123-textbook) and then
prctice the dialogue.


Answer


A - E - C - H - D - J - B - G - E - I


<b>3.While-Speaking</b>


Activity1 Brainstorming


decorate the hall tidy the yard


Preparation for a school festival


send letter of invitation


Activity 2 Mapped Dialogue (On Poster)
Miss Huong Nam
You/tidied/school yard?


Yes/we/you/going
/now/Miss Houng?
To the market/I/buy



cakes/candies/fruit.


Is/anything/you/want
/us/do/while/out?
Not really/our school/look


/nice/meeting. Ah/we//what/do/now
We//decorate/hall.
Could/buy/multi
-colored lights?
All right-bye Bye! Miss Huong


T. runs through – elicits the questions and the
answers.Then models- pairswork.


Example Exchange


Miss Huong: Have you tidied the school yard?
Nam: Yes,we have. Where are you going
now,Miss Houng?


Miss Huong: To the market.I’ll buy some
cakes,candies and some fruits.


Miss Huong:Is there anything you want us to do
while you are going out?


Miss Huong:Not really,but our school look nice at
the meeting.



Nam: Ah! We know what to do now.


We’ll decorate the hall. Could you buy some
multi-colored lights?


Miss Huong:All right.Bye
Nam: Bye,Miss Huong.


Ss answer T’s model elicitation
questions-repeat in
chral-ind.-copy into the notebook-answer T’s
questions about concept check.
T. runs through – elicits the
questions and the answers.Then
models- pairwork.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs with the
words or phrases relating to the
preparation for a school festival.


Ss answer-listen to T. And then
work in open-closed pairs.


<b>IV Consolidation:</b>(involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:


- Revise talking about the preparation.
- Memorize vocab.



- Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 3(section Read P.124-125)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

---Period: 80

<b>UNIT 13:FESTIVALS</b>


<i>Lesson 3:Read(P.124-125)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the main ideas and details of the
text.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Christmas vocab


<b> II.Skills: </b>Reading


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the attendances


<b> II.Checking: </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Revision:</b> Brainstorming


“What do you do at Christmas?”


<i> send greeting </i>


Christmas



<i> visit friends go to church</i>


<b>2.Pre-Reading</b>


T/F statements Prediction:


1.People decorated christmas tree in the early 1500s.
2.The Christmas tree came from England.


3.The Christmas card was first designed by a
Russian man in the mid-ninetennth century.


4.800 years ago, Christmas songs were performed.
5.Santa Claus first appeared in Riga in 1823.


T. asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs and in groups
with the T/f Prediction.


<b>3.While-Reading:</b>


Activity 1:


T.asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction.
Answer:


1.T


2.F(…Litvian city of Riga)
3.F(…Englishman)



4.T


5.F(…USA)
Activity 2:


T.asks Ss to read the text again and answer the
questions in pairs.


Answer:


a)It came to the USA in the 1800s.


b)Because he wanted to send Christmas greetings to
his friends.


c)They first performed 800 years ago.
d)It was written by Clement Clark Moore.
e)It based on the decscription of Saint Nicholas.


<b>4.Post-Reading:</b> Mapped Dialogue


LAN MAI
What/you/like/best/Christmas?


Santa Claus
Why/you/like/best?


Because/he/give
children/presents


How/about/Christmas tree?


Oh/it/beautiful
Do/you/send/Christmas


card/friends?


Of course/I


T. runs through – elicits the questions and the


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups with the prediction.


Ind.,then share in pairs and in
groups, Ss read the text and
check their prediction.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


answers.Then models- pairwork.
Example exchange


Lan: What do you like best at Christmas?
Mai: I like Santa Claus best.


Lan: Why do you like him best?


Mai: Because he gives children presents.
Lan: How about Christmas tree?



Mai: Oh!it isbeautiful.


Lan: Do you often send Christmas cards to your
friends?


Lan: Of course, I do.


Ss answer-listen to T. And then
work in open-closed pairs.


<b>IV Consolidation:</b>(involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:


- Memorize vocab.


- Read the text again and answer the questions.


- Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 4(section Write P.126-127)
<i>(Write a report)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 81

<b>UNIT 13:FESTIVALS</b>


<i>Lesson 4:Write(P.126-127)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write a report on a festival.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Simple Past and Passive form


<b> II.Skills: </b>Writing and Reading


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the attendances


<b> II.Checking: </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Revision:</b>


What do you know about the rice-cooking festival?




water-fetching
Rice-cooking Festival


fire-making


<b>2.Pre-Writing:</b>


Activity 1:
T.runs through.


T. has Ss to do task 1(P.126-Textbook) ind.,then in
pairs and in groups.



Answer


1.rice-ccoking
2.one


3.water-fetching
4.run


5.water
6.traditional
7.bamboo
8.six
9.separate
10.addded


T.asks Ss to read the completed report.
Activity 2:


T. gets Ss to choose a festival and then asks Ss to
work in pairs answer the qusetions


(P.127-Ss fill in the nets with information
related to the rice-cooking festival.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups filling the gaps with
missing information.


Ss answer the questions about the


going-to-write report.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


Textbook) before writing a report.


<b>3.While-writing:</b>


T.has Ss to write a report ind and then share in pairs
and in groups.


<b>4.Post-Writing:</b> Exhibition


T.asks Ss to stick their report on the board and elicit
the correction from other Ss.


and in groups.


Ss correct the writing for each
other.


<b>IV Consolidation:</b>(involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:


- Complete the report into thenotebook.


- Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 5(section Language Focus P.128-130)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>



---Date:


Period: 82

<b>UNIT 13:FESTIVALS</b>



<i>Lesson 5:Language Focus(P.126-127)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to Further Practice in some
studied grammar points.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Passive form,Reported speech


<b> II.Skills: </b>Writing and speaking


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the attendances


<b> II.Checking: </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


PASSIVE FORM
Task 1:


T. asks Ss to recall the passive form.And the asks
Ss to coplete the sentences with suitable Passive
Form.



Answer:


a.were performed
b.was decorated
c.is made


d.will be held
e.was awarded
f.was written
Task 2


Answer:


T.asks Ss to complete the coversation with suitable
given verbs in the box.


Answer:
1.jumped
2.broken
3.broken
4.scatted
5.pulled


T. asks Ss to work in pairs practicing the completed
dialogue.


COMPOUND WORDS
Example:


It’s a contest in which participants have to cook


rice. It’s a fire-making festival


Form: Noun+V- ing


T. asks Ss to work ind. Rewrite the given sentences


Ind.,then share in pairs and in
groups, Ss recall the passive
form.And the asks Ss to coplete
the sentences with suitable
Passive.


Ss complete the coversation with
suitable given verbs in the box
ind,then in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


using the compound words.
Answer


a. It’s a fire-making festival.
b. It’s a bull-fighting festival.


c. The U.S has a big car-making industry.


d. Last week T.H.D school held a flower-arranging
contest.


e.VietNam is a rice-exporting country.


REPORTED SPEECH


T. asks Ss to recall how to change from the direct
speech to reported speech.


Example:


a. “I’m a plumber.” He said he was a plumber.


Answer:


a.He said he was a plumber.
b.he said he could fix the faucets.
c.he said the pipe were broken.


d.He said the new pipes were very expensive.
e.He said she had to pay him then.


<b>IV Consolidation:</b>(involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:


- Complete the task into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 14:Wonders of the world(Getting Started’Listen and read P.126-127)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:



Period: 83

<b>UNIT 14:WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>

<b> </b>


<i>Lesson1:Getting Started,Listen and read(P.131-132)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to seek information about
wonders of the world.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Question words before to-infinitives


<b> II.Skills: </b>Reading, listening andspeaking


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the attendances


<b> II.Checking: </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>eacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1 Revision: </b>Getting started


T. asks Ss to match the pictures on P.131 (text book)
with names of famous world landmarks.


Answer:


a. The Pyramids
b. Sydneyopera house
c. Stonehenge


<b>2 Presentation:</b>



Presentation dialogue.


T. asks Ss to listen to the dialogue, then practice the
dialogue


Answer:
1. game
2. place
3. clue
4. Viet nam
5. America
6. golden
7. right
8. was


Model sentences
I don’t know how to play it.


Work in groups to to match the
pictures on P. 131 (text book)
with names of famous world
landmarks :


Listen and practice the dialogue
Then work ind. to complete the
sumary, use the words from the
dialogue.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

<b>eacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>



Form: I don’t know +Question Words+ to –Vinf


<b>3 Practice </b>


T. asks Ss to write the names of famous world
landmarks on the board


Example :
Phong Nha cave
The Pyramids


Sydney Opera House
Stonehenge


Guessing game
Example Exchange:
S1 : Is it in Viet nam ?
S2 : No, it isn’t


S3 : Is it in China ?
S1: Yes, it’s


S2 : Is it the Great wall?
S3: That’s correct


<b>4 Further practice :</b>


T. says :” <i>Nga answered Nhi s questions. She then</i>’



<i>gave Nhi some additional information, use the</i>
<i>words to write the information that Nga gave to</i>
<i>Nhi .</i>”


Answer:


a.Nga told Nhi how to go there.
b.Nga show Nhi where to get tickets.


c.Nga point out Nhi where to buy souvernirs.


d.Nga advise Nhi how to go from My son to Hoi An.
e.Nga told Nhi what to do there during the visit.


Ss work ind.


to write the information that
Nga gave to Nhi


Then share with their friends


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:


<b>V.Homework</b>:


-Revise “I don’t know………..’’


-Prepare Unit 14:Wonders of the world (Read P.126-134)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>



---Date:


Period:84

<b> UNIT 14:WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>

<b> </b>



<b> </b>

<i>Lesson 2:Speak and Listen(P.132-134)</i>



<b> A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the wonders of
the world and listen to an advertisement for finding mistakes.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Indirect/reported Speech .


<b> II.Skills:</b> Speaking and Listening


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


I<b>.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the attandence


<b> II.Checking:</b> I don’t know……..


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Revision: </b>Matching


T. asks Ss to match the names of wonder with their
countries(answer keys).


1.Great wall a.The USA 2.Empire
state building b.Malaysia



3.Petronas Twin Towers c.England
4.Great barrier Reef d.Australia


5.Eiffel Tower e.South central Asia
6.Mount Everrest f Viet nam


7.Big Ben g.China
8.Ha long bay h.France


<b>2 Pre-Speaking: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


T. asks Ss to make more questions (P.132 )
Example Exchange :
Is Great wall in Viet nam ?


Is Phong Nha cave in the southern in Viet nam ?
Is Ha long Bay a world heritage site ?


Is Big Ben in the USA ?


T.asks Ss to do the survey in pairs.


T.explains task 2 (P.133-textbook)→indirect
questions.


Example Exchange :
Is Great Wall in Viet nam -?



I asked Lan if /whether Great Wall was in VNam.


T. asks Ss to compaire direct with indirect
questions.


<b>3 While -Speaking : </b>Task 2 P.133 (intextbook)
T.asks Ss to work in pairs/groups with the task.
Answer keys:


1.I asked Lan if /whether Great wall was in Viet
nam .She said that it wasn't.


2.I asked Nga if Petronas Twin Towers in Malaysia
was the hightest building in the world .She said that
it was.


3.I askes Lan whether the Great barrier Reef was
a world heritage site. She said that it was.


<b>4 Post-Speaking: </b>Listening
Pre-Teach


crystal-clear(n)
snokel(n)
coral(n)
rainforest(n)
jungle(n)
marine(n)



Open-Prediction:


T. asks Ss to predict 4 mistakes in the
advertisementP.133 (in textbook).And then asks Ss
to listen to the advertisement and check their
prediction ind.,then share in pairs


Answer
1. far north
2. hotel
3. rainforest
4.(077)6924 3927


Ss work in pairs Ss to make more
questions (P 132 ) in pairs.


Ss work ind.,then shre in pairs to
change questions into indirect
questions.


Ss work ind. to do task 2 P .133
-text book


Ss predict the mistakes in the
advertisement P.133 (in
textbook).And then listen to the
advertisement and check their
prediction ind.,then share in pairs


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>: Exercise 3 p.85-86-Indirect questionswith “if” and “whether”



<b>V.Homework</b>:


-Revise Indirect/reported Speech


-Complete Exercise 3 p.85-86 into the notebook.


-Prepare Unit 14:Wonders of the world (Read P.126-134)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:85

<b> UNIT 14:WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>

<b> </b>



<b> </b>

<i>Lesson 3:Read(P.134)</i>



<b> A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the main
ideas and details of the text .


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Wonders of the world .


<b> II.Skills:</b> Reading


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

I<b>.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the attandence


<b> II.Checking:</b> Exercise 3 p.85-86-Indirect questionswith “if” and “whether”


<b> III.New lesson:</b>



<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1 Revision:</b>


T.asks Ss to match the wonders with their
city/country.


1.Statue of liberty a.San Franciusco
2.Golden gate bridge b.India


3.Taj Mabal c.Egypt
4.Pyramid of cheops d.China
5.Great wall e.Cambodia
6.Angkor wat f.New york


Answer 1- f, 2- a, 3-b, 4- c, 5- d, 6- e
T. asks Ss some questions:


S1:When will I have go to see the Statue of liberty?
S2:You’ll have to go to New York.


<b>2.Pre-Reading </b>:
Pre-teach:


(to)compile (produce a list)
(to)honor (translation)
(to)claim (translation)
religious(adj) (translation)
royal (adj) (translation)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus


,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: Slap the board


Open-predidiction:


Pyramid of Cheops
Wonders mentioned


in the text<b> </b>


<b>3 While- Reading :</b>


Activity1:


T.asks Ss to read the text to check their prediction
then asks Ss to complete the sentences P.134 ( text
book)


Activity2 Multiple Choice P.134-textbook
Answer: a - C , b - A , c - D , d - B


<b>4 Post-Reading: </b>Language Focus 1 P.136.
Answer


a) was completed
b)was constructed
c)was designed
d)was presented
e)was reached



Ss work in ind.,then in pairs to
match the wonders with their
city/ country,then answer the
questions.


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat
ind.-in chorus,then answer about the
stress – meaning and copy
into the notebook.




Ss work ind. to predict the
wonders mentioned in the text.


Ss read the text and check their
prediction.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs with
the Multiple Choice.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs with
Language focus 1 P.136.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:


<b>V.Homework</b>:


-Memorize vocab.



-Read the text again and answer the questions.
-Revise Passive Form


-Complete Language Focus 1 P.136 into the notebook.
- Prepare Unit 14:Wonders of the world (Write-P.135)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

Period:86

<b> UNIT 14:WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>

<b> </b>



<i> Lesson 4:Write(P.135)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write a letter to a friend.
<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Verb+ to -infinitives/ simple past.


<b> II.Skills:</b> Reading and writing


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the attandence


<b> II.Checking:</b> Read the text(p.1340 and answer the questions.


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b> 1 Pre-writing </b>:


Pre-Teach:



park ranger (n) (visual aid)
(to)hike (explanation)
edge (n) (picture)
inhabitant (n) (explanation)
the Stone Age (n) (translation )
magnificent (n) (translation)
breathtaking (n) (translation)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab:R.O.R



Activity1:


T. asks Ss to complete the letter Tim sent to Hoa
about the trip to the Grand Canyon(P.35) and then
asks Ss to read the read the letter and check their
answers ind.,then in pairs and in groups.


Answer <b> </b>1 –C ; 2 – B ; 3 – D ; 4 - A
Activity 2: comprehension Questions


T. asks Ss to answer the questions:


1 Where have Tim and his class been ?
2 How long were they there ?


3 What was the weather like?


4 What did they do ?<b> </b>


Answer:


1.They’ve just returned from a trip to the Grand
Canyon in Amazon.


2.They’ve been there for a week.
3.It’s cool.


4.They visited the edge of Canyon.


<b>3 While- writing :</b>


T asks Ss to practice writing a letter to a
friend-ind.,then in pairs basing on the given promts(Task 2
P.135 -text book).


<b>4 Post-writing : </b>Correction


T. asks Ss to write down on the board to corrects
mistakes.


Suggesting letter


May 30,2010
Dear Thu,


How are you?i hope that you’re studying for your
exams next moth.My class has just returned from a


trip to Bach Ma.It’s a part of the National Park.We
spent two days there and we didn’t want to leave.
Although is was summer, it was cool because the
area is more than about 1,500 meters above the sea


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the
stress – meaning and copy into
the notebook.


Ss work ind.,then share in pairs
completing the letter Tim sent to
Hoa about the trip to the grand
Canyon P.35-text book using the
given phrases.


Ss read the letter again and answer
the questions ind.,then in pairs.


Work ind. to


to practice writing a letter to a
friend (task 2 P. 135 -text book )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

level.


On our first day, the tuoe-guider led us to Vong Hai
Dai Hill and Do Quyen water-fall.He also talked
about the history of the area.



That’s all I have to tell you about.what do you plan
to do during the Summer vacation?Write to me
after your exams.


Your friends,


<i>Phong </i>


<b>IV Consolidation</b>: Format of a letter*


<b>V.Homework</b>:


-Memorize vocab.


-Complete the letter into the notebook.
-Revise Verb+ to -infinitives/ simple past.


- Prepare Unit 14:Wonders of the world (Lagua Focus-P.136-137)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:87

<b> UNIT 14:WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>

<b> </b>



<b> </b>

<i>Lesson 5:Language Focus(P.136-137)</i>


<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to Further Practice in some studied Grammar


Points.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>


Passive form, indirect questions with if and whether, question words before to -infinitives
and verb+ to infinitives


<b> II.Skills:</b>Writing ,Speaking


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the atandence
<b> II.Checking:</b> (No checking)


<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b> 1.Passive form :</b>


T.asks Ss to recall the Pasive Form.


And then T.asks Ss to complete the sentences,
use the Passive Form of the verbs in the box
ind.,then in pairs.<b> </b>


T gives the feedback.
Answer:


a.was completed
b.was constructed


c.was designed
d.was presented
e.was reached


<b>2.Indirect questions with if and whether</b>“ ” “ ”
T. says:”<i>Yesterday Nga and Nhi talked about </i>
<i>My son .</i>” Then asks Ss to reported the questions
Nhi asked Nga ind.,then in pairs and in groups.
T gives the feedback.


Answer:


b,Nhi asked Nga if/whether it was far from Ha
noi.


c,Nhi asked Nga if/whether My son was in
Quang Nam provice.


d,Nhi asked Nga if/whether people lived at My
Son.


e,Nhi asked Nga if/whether many tourists visited
my son every year.


f, Nhi asked Nga if/ whether I wanted to visit


Ss work ind. to complete the
sentences, use the passive form of
the verbs in the box.<b> </b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


My Son one day.


<b>3 Question words before to -infinitives</b> :
T. says Nga answer Nhi 's questions then she
gave Nhi some additional information, and then
asks Ss to use the words to write about the
information that Nga gave to Nhi.


Answer:


a, Nga told Nhi how to go there.
b, Nga told Nhi where to get tickets.
c, Nga points out Nhi.


d, Nga advised Nhi how to go from M.S to H.A.
e, Nga tell Nhi what to do there during the visit.


<b>4.To-infinitives or Bare infinitives</b>


T. asks Ss to complete the passage, use either the
to infinitives or the bare infinitives form of the
verb in brackets.


T gives the feedback.
Answer:


1, to jog
2, go



3, to gather
4, to rain
5, to reach
6, to continue
7, get


Ss work ind.,then in pairs to report
the questions Nhi askd Nga.


Ss work ind. to complete the
passage, use either the to infinitives
or the bare infinitives form of the
verb in brackets.


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>: (involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:


-Complete Tasks into the notebook.
-Revise studied Grammar Points.
- Prepare for Revision Preriod.


<i>(Passive form, Reported speech,question words before to infinitiveEs, tenses–</i> <i>…)</i>


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:88

<b> REVISION</b>




<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to revise some studied Grammar points for
One-Period Test.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Passive form, Reported speech,Question Words before to –
infinitives,Tenses……


<b> II.Skills:</b>Writing ,Speaking


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the atandence
<b> II.Checking:</b> (No checking)


<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Past Progressive Tense: </b>


T recalls the form: S + were/ was + V+ing
Uses <i>: Expressing an action which was happing in </i>
<i>a definited point of time in the past.</i>


''When/While '' used to combine with Past simple
clauses(actions).


<i>Example: </i>



-When she was having dinner I came to her house.
-While I was playing tennis, my son was playing
video game.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


a, When I... (have) breakfast, she ….(come)
b, While I ... (eat)she ...(drink )tea.


c,Last night, Minh ...(watch) TV at 8.30.
Answer


a.was having/came


b.was eating/was drinking
c.was watching


<b>2Indirect questions with if and whether:</b>


-T recalls the way to change questions into indirect
questions


T. asks Ss to change these questions into indirect
questions. Then T corrects their mistakes


1, Is Phong Nha in QB provice ?


She asked me...
2, Does she play tennis ?



She asked me...
3, Can you go to the zoo with me ?


Lan asked Hoa ...
Answer


1.She asked me if Phong Nha was in QB provice.
2.She asked me if she played tennis.


3.Lan asked Hoa if she went to the zoo.


<b>3 Passive Form:</b>


T. asks Ss to put the verb in the correct tense
a, A folk song ...( perform) in my class.
b, The statue of liberty ………...( complete ) in
1976.


c,'' Gio lanh dau mua ''………...(write ) by Thach
Lam.


Answer:


a, is performed
b, was completed
c,was written


<b>4.Compound Words:</b>


T. asks Ss to rewrite these sentences.



a, This is a machine which is used to wash dishes .
It's ...
b, Its a contest in which participant have to fetch
water .


It's ………...
-Then T. gives the feedback.


<b>Answer:</b>


a, It's a wash dishes washing - machine.
b, It's water.- fetching contest.


Ss work ind.and put the verbs in
the correct form.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs to
change these questions into
indirect questions.


Ss work ind. to put the verbs in the
correct tense.Then share with their
friends


Ss work ind. to rewrite these
sentences using the compound
word form and then share with
their friends.



<b>IV.Consolidation</b>: (involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:


- Well-prepare for One-Period Test


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 89

<b> ONE-PERIOD TEST</b>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to tested some studied
knowledge for grade.


<b> I. Knowledge:</b> Tenses,Passive,Reported speech…..


<b> II.Skills: </b>writing


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

<b> II.Handing out the papers: </b>
<b> III.Testing:</b>


<i>I.Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences</i>


1) When I came to visit her last night,she...a bath.


A.is having B.was having C.has had D.had
2) The Pyramid of Cheops in Egypt is one of seven...of the world



A.landmarks B.historic places C.famous sights D.wonders


3) She asked the guide...Phong Nha Cave was the most beautiful cave in Viet Nam
A.where B. whether C.which D.what


4) ...your homework finished last night?


A.Does B.Did C.Do D.Was
5) It is a contest in which participants have to fetch water from the river.


=>It’s a...contest.


A.fire-making B.rice-cooking C.water-fetching D.making-fire
6) I don’t know how………….the game.


A.play B.to play C.played D.can I play
II.Rewrite the following sentences


1. My father decorated the Christmas tree with colored lights.


- The Christmas tree……… ……….. ...


2. A new super market is going to be build next year.


- They……… ……… …… ……….. . . ....


3. The last time I played tennis was in 2009.


- I haven’t……… ……… … ………... .. ..



4.They played a game.It’s called 20 questions.


- They…… … ……… ……… ……… ……… …….... .. . .. . .


5. Nam asked me if I could play the guitar.


- Nam asked me:……… ……….


III.Put the corrects tense of the verbs in the brackets


1. Mrs Thoa(cook)……… ………. ,when Tuan arrived home.


2. I (do)…………...my homework at half past seven last night.


3. He (do)………...nothing since he got up.


4. This school (built )………. in 1998.


5. A new school ...(build) in my village by the workers .
IV.Read the passage carefully,then answer the questions


Viet Nam’s New Year is celabrated according to the Lunar calendar.It’s officially known
as Tet Nguyen Dan,or Tet.It begins between January twenty-first and February
nineteen.The exact date changes from year to year.Vietnamese people usually make
prepararions for the holiday several weeks beforehand.They tidy their houses, cook
special food, clean and make offerings on the family altars.On the New Year’s Eve,
people sit up to midnight to see the New Year in, then they put on new clothes and give
one another the greeting of the season.Tet last ten days.The first three days are the most
important.Vietnamese people believe that how people act during those days will influence


the whole year.As a result,they make every effort to avoid arguments and smile as much
as possible.


*Questions


1.When does Tet begin?


……… ……… ……….. .. ....


2.Do they never smile in days of Tet?


……… ……… ……….. .. ....


3.What do people prepare before Tet?


……… ……… ……….. .. ....


4. Is Tet also called Lunar New Year?


……… ……… ……….. .. ....


<b>IV.Handing in the papers:</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


-Revise all tested knowledge forTest-Correction period.
Date:


Period:90

<b> TEST CORRECTION</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to be corrected their marked papers for more


testing experiences and for consolidation some studied knowledge as well.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Passive form, Reported speech,Question Words before to –
infinitives,Tenses……


<b> II.Skills:</b>Speaking


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b> Greeting and check the atandence


<b>15-MINUTE TEST</b>


<i>* Choose A,B,C or D to complete the following sentences:</i>
1. My sister was cooking …. I was doing my homework.


<i>A. while</i> <i>B. in case</i> <i>C. if</i> <i>D. because</i>
2. Jim asked me….. I was going to help them


<i>A. and</i> <i>B. but</i> <i>C. if</i> <i>D. while</i>
3.Would you mind ……… off the television


<i>A. turning</i> <i>B. turn</i> <i>C. reduce</i> <i>D. reducing</i>
4. In the………. contest, two team members had to make a fire in the traditional way.


<i>A. water- fetching</i> <i>B. fire- making</i> <i>C. rice- cooking</i> <i>D. fishing</i>
5. Ba is studying very hard…… pass the final exam.


<i>A. for</i> <i>B. in order to</i> <i>C. so to</i> <i>D. as to</i>
6. I can see a boy…… a water buffalo



<i>A. ride</i> <i>B. riding</i> <i>C. to</i> <i>D. rode</i>
7. Many students are sitting and reading books and magazines in the …….


<i>A. stadium</i> <i>B. library</i> <i>C. market</i> <i>D. sreet</i>
8. The fire is made in the………. way.


<i>A. new</i> <i>B. newest</i> <i>C. closed</i> <i>D. traditional</i>
9. Sydney Opera House………… in 1973.


<i>A.was completed</i> <i>B.completed</i> <i>C.had completed</i> <i>D. has completed</i>
10. It is a contest in which participants have to cook rice. =>It is a……… contest.


<i>A. water- fetching</i> <i>B. fire- making</i> <i>C. rice- cooking</i> <i>D. racing</i>
11. Many students are sitting and reading books and magazines in the …….


<i>A. market</i> <i>B. sreet</i> <i>C. library</i> <i>D. stadium</i>
12. In the………. Contest two team members had to make a fire in the traditional way.


<i>A. rice- cooking</i> <i>B. fire- making</i> <i>C. water- fetching</i> <i>D. fishing</i>
13. Jim asked me….. I was going to help them


<i>A. if</i> <i>B. while</i> <i>C. and</i> <i>D. but</i>
14. Would you mind ……… off the television


<i>A. reduce</i> <i>B. reducing</i> <i>C. turn</i> <i>D. turning</i>
15.The Pyramid of Cheops in Egypt is one of seven...of the world


<i> A.landmarks B.historic places C.famous sights D.wonders</i>



16.She asked the guider...Phong Nha Cave was the most beautiful cave in Viet Nam
<i> A.where B. whether C.which D.what</i>


17...your homework finished last night?


<i> A.does B.Did C.do D.was</i>
18.Are you free...Tuesday evening?


<i> A.in B.at C. on D. for</i>


20.It is a contest in which participants have to make a fire.=>It’s a...contest.
<i> A.fire-making B.rice-cooking C.water-fetching D.making-fire</i>
Answer:


1.A ; 2.C ; 3.A ; 4.B ; 7.B ; 8.D ; 9.A ; 10.C ; 11.C ;
12.B ; 13.D ; 14.D ; 15.D ; 16.B ; 17. D ; 18.C ; 20.B
<b> II.Handing out the marked papers:</b>


<b>III.Test correction:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


<i>I.Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences</i>


1) B.was having
2) D.wonders


3) B.whether
4) D.Was



5) C.water-fetching
6) B.to play


<i>II.Rewrite the following sentences</i>


1.The Christmas tree were decorated with colored
lights by my father.


2.They are going to build a new super market next


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


year.


3. I haven’t

played

tennis since 2009.
4.They played a game called 20 questions.
5. Nam asked me if I could play the guitar.
- Nam asked me:”Can you play the guitar?”


<i>III.Put the corrects tense of the verbs in the</i>
<i>brackets</i>


5. was cooking
6. was doing
7. He has done
8. was built


5. is going to be built


<i>IV.Read the passage carefully,then answer the</i>


<i>questions</i>


Answer


1.It begins between January twenty-first and
February nineteen.


2.No,they don’t.


3.They tidy their houses, cook special food, clean
and make offerings on the family altars.


4. Yes, it is.


Ind.,then share in pairs,Ss rewite
the sentences again.


Ind.,then share in pairs,Ss give the
suitable form of the verbs and the
clues for the verb conjugation.


Ss read the text again and retell the
answers again.


<b>IV.Mark reporting:</b>
<b>V.Homework</b>:


-Revise all tested knowledge again.


-Prepare Unit 15: Computers(Getting started;Listen and read P.138)



<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:91

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 15: COMPUTERS</b>


<i>Lesson 1:Getting started;Listenand Read (P.138)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know about computer and
the its advantages.


<b> I. Knowledge:</b> Cumputer vocab


<b> II.Skills: </b>Reading and Speaking


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement:</b> Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking: </b> (No checking)


III.New Lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>I.Revision:</b> Getting started (P.138-Textbook)


T.asks Ss to make a list of how computers can help
us.


Example:



-Computer can save time.
-…….


Suggested keys:


-Computers can save time.


-Computers can solve problems exactly and quikly
-Computers can gather a wide range of information
-……..


<b>2.Presentation:</b>


Pre-Teach:


printer (n) (translation)
(to) connect: (translation)
jam (n) (translation)
manual (n) (translation)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports vocab on the


board-stress-Ss work ind.,then in pairs for a list
of the advantages of the
computers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>



meaning.


Check vocab: What and Where


T.sets the scene and asks Ss to listen to the
dialogue.


<b>3.Practice:</b>


Activity 1:


T.asks Ss to practice the dialogue with their
partners.


Activity 2


T. has Ss to do Task 2(a-f) P.139-Textbook ind.,then
share in pairs and in groups.


Answer:
a.F
b.O
c.O
d.O
e.F
f.F


<b>4.Further Practice:</b>


T. asks Ss to do Task 2 P.140(Textbook)


Example


I think computers are usefull.


stress – meaning and copy into
the notebook.


Ss practice the dialogue with their
partners again.


Ss work ind.,then share in pairs
and in groups, do Task 2(a-f)
P.139-Textbook and checkthe
statements are Opinion(O) or
Fact(F).


Ss do Task 2 P.140(Textbook) in
pairs.


<b>IV.Consolidation:</b> Task 2 P.140(Textbook) correction*


<b>V.Homework:</b>


-Revise vocab


-Read the dialogue again and gasp the advantages of computers
-Complete Task 2 P.140(Textbook) into the notebook


-Prepare Unit 15: Computers(Speak and Listen P.139-141)



<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:92

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 15: COMPUTERS</b>


<i> Lesson 2:Speak and Listen (P.139)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use some common
useful expressions to express agreement and disagreement and complete the flow chart
through listening.


<b> I. Knowledge:</b> Cumputer vocab


<b> II.Skills: </b>Speaking and Listening


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement:</b> Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking: </b> (No checking)


III.New Lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Pre-Speaking:</b>Braistorm:


- Write the topic on the board: Useful expressions
to express agreement and disagreement.


- Put the table on the board and elicit sts’answer


then write them on the table.


Opinions:


<i>I like</i> ...


<i>I don t like ’</i> ...


<i>I think ...</i>
<i>I feel ...</i>
<i>I don t believe ’</i> <i>….</i>


Agreement


<i>So do I/I disagree</i>


Disagreement


<i>I agree but………</i>


Matching:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


- Put the photocopied pictures on p.139 on the right
of board and the word cues on the left (not in
order).


-Run through and ask sts to match the words with
the right pictures.



Picture a - Playing the rain
Picture b - Driving a car
Picture c - Foreign food


Picture d - Reading comic books


<b>2.While-Speaking: </b>Picture Drill


- Get a student to demonstrate the model
Example Exchange: (a)


T: I think driving a car is easy.


Ss: I disagree. I think it’s difficult to drive a car.
(or) So do I.


Ask Ss to use the adjectives in the box on p.140 to
express their opinions after going through the
meaning of some new words.


a.entertaining
b.time-consuming
c.challenging


- Have Ss to use the pictures on the board to
practice speaking with their partners.


- Work in pairs.



<b>3.Pre-listening:</b>


- Put the flow chart on the board.


- Get sts to understand how events are sequenced
in a flow chart and the meanings of all the shapes
used in the chart.


(Circle) starting/ stopping point
(Triangle) Questions


(Oval) Answers


<b>4. While-listening:</b>
<b>* Gap fill:</b>


- Ask Ss to look at the flow chart and guess the
words in the gaps.


- Open tape (twice)


- Ask Ss to listen to fill in the gaps then share the
answers with their friends.


- Call on Ss go to the board to write down their
answers.


- Open tape again.


- Give feedback and correct.


Answer key:


a/ Do you have the coorect change?
b/ Yes.


c/ What do you want to drink?
d/ Take it.


<b>5. Post-speaking and listening</b>:
* Mapped dialogue:


- Present the dialogue and have sts repeat, sentence
by sentence.


- Have sts make similar dialoues refering the cues
on p.140 (below the dialogue) to replace the
information.


- Put the map dialogue chart on the board.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs with the
matching.


Ss work in opened0closed pairs.


Ss work in pairs.


A: I’m having problems with...
B: What’s wrong?



A: It doesn’t work. I think ...
B: No, you didn’t...


A: Oh! Sorry.


<b>IV.Consolidation:</b> Task 2 P.140(Textbook) correction*


<b>V.Homework:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

-Prepare Unit 15: Computers(Read P.139-141)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


Date:


Period:93

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 15: COMPUTERS</b>


<i> Lesson 3: Read (P.141)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the main ideas
and details of the text .


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Advantage of computer on education.


<b> II.Skills:</b> Reading


<b>B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b>I. Settlement</b> Greeting and check the attandence


<b> II.Checking:</b> vocabulary



<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1 Brainstorming:</b>


studying


<b>2.Pre-Reading </b>:
Pre-teach:


- freshmen (n) : (translation)
- jack (n): ( translation)
- restrict (v) : (synonym)
- bulletin (n): ( translation)
- skeptical (adj): (example)
- impact (n): (antonym)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: Slap the board


Guided questions:


1. Can students study at home without
going to university library by using
computers?


2. How can they get information and discus
problem?



<b>3 While- Reading :</b>


Activity1:


T.asks Ss to read the text to check their prediction
then asks Ss to complete the sentences P.134 ( text
book)


Activity2 True / False (p141,142-textbook)
Answer:


a. T b. T c. T d. F e. T f. T
Activity3: Answer ( p 142)


a. It has no library.


b. All the information normally found in library
c. A computer


d. The difference is that over 20 million people may
have access to them.


<b>4 Post-Reading: </b>Discus on question e, exercise 2 p
142.


- Would you like to complete a college degree from
home?


- Why /Why not?



- Answer individully


- Ss answer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s
model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the


stress – meaning and copy
into the notebook.




- Ss work ind. to predict the
answers.


- Ss read the text and check
their prediction.


- Ss work individually answer
True/ False statements


-Work in pair, ask and answer
the questions.


- work in 2 groups


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:


<b>V.Homework</b>:



-Memorize vocab.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

-Read the text again and answer the questions.
-Revise Passive Form


-Complete Language Focus 1 P.136 into the notebook.
- Prepare Unit 14:Wonders of the world (Write-P.135)


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:94

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 15: COMPUTERS</b>


<i> Lesson 4: Write (P.142- 143)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES</b>: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write instructions about
how to use the printer.


<b>I. Knowledges :</b> Writing a set of instructions


<b> II. Skills:</b> Writing .


<b>B.Procedures</b>:


<b>I. Settlement</b> Greeting


Check atandence
<b>II.Checking:</b> Asks Ss to write vocabulary
<b>III.New lesson:</b>



<b>Teacher's activities</b>
<b> 1 Revision : Brainstorming</b>


T. asks Ss to write the parts of a computer
computer


<b> 2 Pre-writing :</b>
<b> Pre-teach:</b>


paper input tray (picture):
power button ( picture):
icon ( picture):


out put path ( picture):


monitor screen ( picture): m n h×nh chÝnh à
( to) remove (mime): di chun


(to) load ( translation ): t¶i
( to ) click (mime): nh¾p chuét


-T uses the techniques to elicit each word


T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy



<b>Check: What and where </b>




paper input tray power button icon




monitor screen load


-T calls out words in English, Ss slap the words in
Vietnamese


<b>3 While-writing :</b>


- T asks Ss to write instructions on how to use the
printer.


<b>4 Post -writing :</b>


T. asks Ss to stick poster on the board to feedback


<b>Students' activities</b>


Work ind. to write the
parts of a computer
-screen



<b>-</b> priter


<b>-</b> -key board


<b>-</b> mouse
Listen and repeat in
choral, in groups, ind.
Then copy down on their
notebooks




Work in groups to slap the
words in Vietnamese.


Work in ind. to write
instructions on how to use
the printer.


Then share with their
partern


Choose the best paragraph
to copy down


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

<b>-</b> Do exercises: 1,2


- Prepare ‘’Language focus ‘’


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>



---Date:


Period:95

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 15: COMPUTERS</b>



<i> Lesson 5:</i>

Language focus ( P 144-146 )



<b>A.Objectives</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to remember what they have learnt in unit 15
<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Past simple, presen perfect with yet and already.


<b> II.Skills:</b> writing


<b>B.Procedures</b>:


I<b>,Settlement</b> Greeting


Check atandence
<b>II.Checking:</b> No check


<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b>
<b>1 Presen perfect with yet and already :</b>


T recalls the form


S + have/has + P2
Yet: n»m trong cau phu dinh va nghi van


Already : in the khang dinh


T. asks Ss to look Ba’s diary and complete the dialogue using
yet and already.


<b>Answer:</b>


Yes, T have already done my honework, Mom
I haven’t tidied my room yet.


I have already turned off the washing machine.
I have already called and told aunt Le to have lunch.


<b>2</b>T. asks Ss to ask and answer questions about the flights
following example exchange:


S1: Has the flight to Vientiane departed yet ?
S2: Yes, it has already departed


S1: Has the flight from Los Angeles arrived yet?
S2: No, It hasn’t arrived yet.


3T. asks Ss to read the sentences to check the correct column


<b>Answer keys </b>


Finished


action Incompleted action
I have been to Sapa highland



They have lived in Ca mau for 10
years


She has finished her homework
He has worked with the computer
since early morning


We have found the problems with the
printer


Someone has unplugged the printer <sub></sub>
People have received information


through the internet recently. 


<b>4 Comparison of present perfect and simple past:</b>


<b>T. asks </b>Ss to comparison of present perfect and simple past
then complete the dialogue :


<b>Answer:</b>


1.have you seen....? -. did you see ..? saw - haven’t had
2. haven’t had - 3 have been 4. Have you heard ..?
5. happened 6. had 7. fell 8. broke
9 Has- arrived ..? has -did -arrive- arrived


<b>Students' activities</b>



Work ind.


look Ba’s diary and
complete the


dialogue using yet
and already.


Work ind.


to ask and answer
questions about the
flights following
example exchange


Work ind.


read the sentences to
check the correct
column


Work ind.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

<b>IV Consolidation</b>:


Past simple, presen perfect with yet and already.


<b> V, Homework</b>:


- Prepare Unit 16 Lesson 1



<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


<b>---Date : </b>


<b> Period 96 </b>

<b>Unit16 Inventions </b>



Lesson 1 : Getting started -Listen and read ( P 149-151)



A

<b>.Objectives</b>

:



By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the process of producing chocolate.
<b>I, Knowledges :</b> Passive form


<b> II.Skills:</b> Speaking and listening


<b> B.Procedures</b>:


I<b>,Settlement</b> Greeting


Check atandence
<b> II.Checking:</b> Not check


<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b>
<b> 1 Revision : Brainstorming</b>


T. asks Ss to match these stages in the development of
paper with the correct pictures



Answer: A-c B -c C -e D - a E - d


<b> 2 Presentation :</b>
<b> Pre-teach:</b>


cacao bean (n)( Picture ): h¹t ca cao
process (v) ( translation ): quá trình
manufacture (v)( translation ): s¶n xuÊt
shell ( Picture )


conveyor- belt ( picture ):
(to ) crush (mime ):


(to ) liquify ( Translation ):


-T uses the techniques to elicit each word


T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy


<b>Check: R.O R</b>


cacao bean process manufacture


liquify crush




-T calls out words in English, Ss slap the words in
Vietnamese.


<b>Presentation dialogue</b> :


T. asks Ss to readthe text, role play with students then
asks Ss to practice the text


T. asks Ss to do task 2 on Page.149 text book to match
the half -sentences then write full sentences in noet book


<b>Answer:</b>


a- F, b-D , c -C, d- F, e -B, f-A


<b>3 Practice :</b>


<b>T. asks </b>Ss to describe the process of producing
chocolate


<b>Students' activities</b>


Work in groups to match
these stages in the


development of paper with
the correct pictures



Listen and repeat in
choral, in groups, in
individuall


Then copy down on their
notebooks




Work in groups to slap on
the words in Vietnamese


Listen and practice


Work in inindividually to
do task 2 on Page.149 in
the text book.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

<b>Answer:</b>


Beans are washed, weighed and cooked
Shell are removed


Beans are crushed and liquefied


<b>4 Further practice :</b>


T. asks Ss to do language focus 1 P.154 in the text book
to change the sentences from active into passive



sentences.


-Then T corrects their mistakes.


<b>Answer:</b>


a The document was typed by Mrs Quyen.
b.The computer was repaired by Mr Nhan.
c The picture was drewed by Ba.


d.The lights were turned off by Hoa.
e The cake was baked by Lan.


producing chocolate.


Work in inindividually to
change the sentences
from active into
passivesentences.
Then share with their
friends


( language focus 1 P.154
-text book )


<b>IV Consolidation</b>:


Check the form : passive form


<b> V, Homework</b>:



<b>-</b> Do exercises: 1, 2


- Prepare Unit 16 Lesson 2


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


<b>---Date : </b>


Period: 97 <b> </b>

<b>Unit16 Inventions</b>



Lesson 2 : Speak and listen P 149-151 )



<b>A.Objectives</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about famous inventions.
<b>I, Knowledges :</b> Passive form


<b>II ,Skill : </b>Speaking and listening


<b> B.Procedures</b>:


I<b>,Settlement</b> Greeting


Check atandence
<b> II.Checking:</b> Not check


<b>III, New lesson</b>:


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’



<b> 1 Revision : </b>


T. asks Ss to retell how to chocolate was produced


<b> 2 Pre-speaking :</b>
<b> Pre-teach:</b>


facsimile ( picture ):


reinforced concrete(n) ( Trans): bê tông cốt thép
lound speaker(n) ( visual aid): loa phong thanh
helicopter(n) (visual aid ):máy bay lên thẳng
-T uses the techniques to elicit each word


T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy


<b>Check: R.O R</b>


facsimile reinforced lound speaker




-T calls out words in English, Ss slap the words in
Vietnamese



--T explains the way how to do task 1 P. 149


<b>3 While-speaking :</b>


<b>T. asks </b>Ss to practice speaking; using tables on Pages
150-156 in the text book


Work ind. to


retell how to chocolate was
produced


Listen and repeat in choral, in
groups, ind.


Then copy down on their
notebooks




Work in groups to slap the
words in Vietnamese


Listen the wayhow to do task 1
P. 149


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

Example exchange :


S1: When was reinforced invented ?


S2: IT was invented in 1849


S1: Who was it invented by ?
S2: By F .J Monier


T. asks Ss to write sentences in their notebooks
Example exchange :


Microphone was invented by D.E Hughes in 1878


<b>4 Post-speaking : Listening P. 150 in the text book</b>


T. asks Ss to predict before listening
-Lets Ss listen to the tape


150-156 in the text book
Work ind. to


describe the process of
producing chocolate


Work in to write sentences in
their notebooks


Work in pairs to predict before
listening


Listen to the tape


<b>IV Consolidation</b>:



Check the form : passive form


<b> V, Homework</b>:


<b>-</b> Do exercise


- Prepare Unit 16 Lesson 3


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


<b>---Date : </b>


<b> Period 98 </b>

<b>Unit16 </b>

<b>Inventions</b>



Lesson 3 : Read (P 151-152 )

<b> </b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the main ideas and details of the
text


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>Household appliance vocabulary
<b>II ,Skill : </b>Reading and listening


<b>B.Procedures</b>:


I<b>,Settlement</b> Greeting


Check atandence


<b>II.Checking:</b> Not check


<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b>
<b> 1 Revision : Braistorming</b>


T. asks Ss to brainstorm the vocabulary


Household appliance washing machine
cooker




<b>2 Pre-reading :</b>
<b> Pre-teach:</b>


microwave (visua aid):
toaster (visua aid):
vacuum (visua aid):
appliance (example ):


T uses the techniques to elicit each word


T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy



<b>Check: R.O R</b>




microwave toaster vacuum appliance


<b>Students' activities</b>


Work ind. to


brainstorm the vocabulary


Listen and repeat in
choral, in groups, ind.
Then copy down on their
notebooks




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

-T calls out words in English, Ss slap the words in
Vietnamese


<b>* Open-predicttion</b> :


Work in pairs to do task 2
P. 152 text book


Listen and read the text to
to check their prediction


in groups


Then work ind. to do task
2 P.152 in the text book


Work inindividually to
listen to the tape


<b>IV Consolidation</b>:
Check vocabulary


<b> V, Homework</b>:


<b>-</b> Do exercise


- Prepare Lesson 4 unit 16


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


<b>---Date : </b>


<b> Period 99 </b>

<b>Unit16 </b>

<b>Inventions</b>



Lesson 4 : Write (P 152-153)

<b> </b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write a paragraph to describe how cacao
beans are processed.



<b>I, Knowledges :</b> Passive form
<b>II ,Skill : </b>reading and writing


<b>B.Procedures</b>:


I<b>,Settlement</b> Greeting


Check atandence
<b> II.Checking:</b> Asks Ss to write vocabulary
<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b>
<b> 1 Revision : Braistorming</b>


T. asks Ss to brainstorm the vocabulary


Household appliance washing machine
cooker




<b>2 Pre-reading :</b>
<b> Pre-teach:</b>


microwave (visua aid):
toaster (visua aid):
vacuum (visua aid):
appliance (example ):



T uses the techniques to elicit each word


T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy


<b>Check: R.O R</b>




microwave toaster vacuum


<b>Students' activities</b>


Work ind. to


retell and how to chocolate
was produced


Listen and repeat in
choral, in groups, ind.


Then copy down on their
notebooks





</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>



appliance


-T calls out words in English ,Ss slap on the words in
Vietnamese


<b>* open-prediction</b> :


--T explains how to do task 2 P. 152


<b>3 While-reading :</b>


<b>-</b>T reads the text then asks Ss to read the text to check
their prediction


T. asks Ss to read the text to do task 2 P.152 in the text
book


<b>Answer:</b>


<b>4 Post-reading : </b>


T. asks Ss to listen to the tape


Work in pairs to do task 2
P. 152 text book


Listen and read the text to


to check their prediction
in groups


Then work in


inindividually to do task 2
P.152 in the text book


<b>IV Consolidation</b>:
Check vocabulary


<b> V, Homework</b>:


<b>-</b> Do exercise


- Prepare Lesson 4 unit 16


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:100

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 16: INVENTIONS</b>



<i> Lesson 5:</i>

Language focus ( P 154-156 )



<b>A.Objectives</b>:


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to remember what they have learnt in unit 16
<b>I.Knowledges: </b>passive form, sequence markers.<b> </b>



<b> II.Skills:</b> writing


<b>B.Procedures</b>:


I.<b>Settlement</b> Greeting


Check atandence
<b>II.Checking:</b> No check


<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b>
<b>1. Passive form : </b>


Active: S + V + O
Passive: S + Be + Vpp + by + O
Ex: Miss Lien wrote the letter.


->The letter was written by Miss Lien.


Exercise 1: change the sentences from the active onto the
passive


a. The document was typed by Mrs Quyen.
b. The computer was repaired by Mr Nhan.
c. The picture was drawn by Ba.


d. The lights were turned off by Hoa.
e. The cake was baked by Lan.



Exercise 2: Active or passive? Use the correct form of the verbs
in brackets to complete these sentences.


a. was rewarded
b. won


c. ran


d. was run – was sold


<b>Students' activities</b>


- recall the form


- Work individually.
- write on the board
- correct


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

e. closed


Exercise 3: Put a question for each of the underlined phrases in
the sentences below:


Ex: The facsimile was invented by Alexander Bain in 1843.
-> When was the facsimile invented?


a. Which was invented by W.L.Judson in 1893?


b. Which was brought into Viet Nam by Phung Khac Khoan?
When?



c. By whom and when was the fountain pen invented?


d. Where was the ballpoint pen invented by brothers Lazlo and
Georg Biro in 1935?


e. In which is xerography widely used in commerce and
industry?


<b>2. Sequence markers:</b>


<b>First, then, next, after that, finally</b>


Exercise 4: Use the sequence markers to describe how white
rice is produced in the traditional way. The pictures and
prompts will help you.


<b>-</b> introduce the pictures . Ask: What are they doing?
( Ss may answer into Vietnamese)


<b>-</b> Ask Ss to make sentences orally.


First, the rice crop is harvested. Then, rice plants are threshed.
Next, rice grains are husked by the mill to produce brown rice.
Finally, bran is removed by the mortar and it is winnowed into
white rice.


- Work in pairs.
one read the question
and one another read


the answer.


- correct


- write down the
questions


- Listen


- Make sentences
orally.


- correct
- write down.
- correct


<b>IV Consolidation</b>:


passive voice and sequense markers


<b> V Homework</b>:


- do exercise in workbook.


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---REVIEW FOR ENGLISH 8 (THE SECOND TERM)



<b>Indirect sentences</b>



1. She said:” I am tired”.


...
2. He said to me:” You sing very well”.


...
3. His brother said to me:” I have just bought a new car”.


...
4. He said to your sister:” You play the piano very well”.


...
5. My teacher said me:” You have to do your homework”.


...
6. He said:” I am going to town with my sister”.


...
7. He said to her:” You have bought yourself a new hat”.


...
8. They said:” We are late for our bus”.


...
9. She said to me:” I want to speak to you”.


...
10.She said:” We have finished our work”.


...


11. She asked me:” Can you write English?”.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

12.They asked me:” Do you know where the market is?”.


...
13.He asked me:” Are you a doctor?”.


...
14.He asked me:” Where do you buy it?”.


...
15.She asked me:” When does the movie start?”.


...
16.They asked me:”How long have you learn English?”


...
17.She said to me:” Do you feel well, Hoa?”.


...
18.They said:” What do you say, Tom?”.


...
19.Mai said to Tuan:” Where are you going to spend your holidays?”.
...
20.She said to me:” Can you swim, Betty”.


...
21.She said:” I see Mr. Bean this morning”.



...
22.He said :” I must go to the bank now”.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

PASSIVE VOICE (1)



<b>I. Changing the following sent- into passive voice.</b>



1.I open the window.



The window...



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

<b>Supply the correct verb form of the verbs in parentheses.</b>


1. We (go) . . . . out when the rain (stop) . . . .
2. She (not, come) . . . .until you (be) . . . . . ready


3. We (phone) . . . .as soon as we (arrive) . . . . in Hanoi
4. The man (sit) . . . . next to me was very nervous.


5. Henry doesn’t enjoy ( laugh) . . . . by other people.
6. I like you (meet) . . . . my grandmother.


7. Take this street and you (arrive) . . . . at the airport in 5 minutes.
8. He suggested (travel). . . . around the city by bike.


9. The flight to Kuala Lumpur will ( delay) . . . .because of the heavy rain.
10.This is the first time I ever( visit ) . . . . . Ha Long Bay .


11. She has a lot of books ( write) . . . . in English.



12.The doorbell (ring ) . . . . while I (watch) . . . . television.


13.How fast . . . . you (drive ) . . . . . when the accident (happen) . . . .
14.The train (start) . . . when we (have) . . . . dinner.


15.What . . . . you (do) . . . at this time yesterday?- I (read) . . . . .
16.It suddenly (rain) . . . . . while Susan (sit) . . . .in the garden.


17.Water ( cover) . . . . most of the Earth’s surface.


18.The ship (sink ) . . . . quickly, but fortunately everybody (rescue) . . . .
19.We (not, see ) . . . . the match yesterday afternoon. It (cancel) . . . .
20.You poem should (write). . . . in correct English.


21.. . . You ever ( connect) . . . a printer?


22.I (know) . . . how ( connect) . . . . since I (be) . . . . twelve.
23.Ronando (break) . . . . his leg .


Really? How . . . . . that (happen) . . . .?


24.She (burn) . . . . herself last night?- She ( pick) . . . . . a hot dish .


25.Mr White (play ) . . . . chess with Mr Tran while Mrs White (cook) . . . .
dinner.


26.The teacher asked Ba (go ) . . . . . the blackboard.


27.She said that her mother (not, be) . . . . well, so she couldn’t (go) . . .
the party.



28.I learned to swim when I (be) . . . .young. I (teach) . . . . by my father.
29.It was so late, so we decided (take) . . . . a taxi home.


30.Would you like (come) . . . . to dinner on Sunday?
31.It started (rain) . . . . while we (go) . . . . . . home.
32.Would you mind ( close ) . . . . the windows?


33.They stopped (talk) . . . then they tried (unload ) . . . .. . the vegetables.
34.Don’t forget (turn off) . . . . the lights before you (leave) . . . . .the office.
35.Can you help (iron). . . . the clothes. I hate (do) . . . .it


36.When the teacher came in, the students ( do) . . . . their test.
37. I couldn’t ( make ) . . . . . my car ( start) this morning.


38.She avoids ( meet) . . . . him.


39.They didn’t use to (get ) . . . . up early.


40.A new hospital ( build) . . . . outside the city now.


41.Sometimes I ( get) . . . . up before the sun (rise ) . . . . .
42.Which languages (speak) . . . . in Canada.


43.She asked me if I (can) . . . . lend her some money.


44.We never (see) . . . . “ Gone with the wind”. You ever (see) . . . . . .it?
45.You just (finish) . . . (do) . . . your homework?


46.They (live) . . . . .here since 1975.They never(go) . . . . .to the city.


47.You (see) “<i><b>Harry Porter</b></i>” yet?- I already (see) it.


48.When . . . . you (see) . . . .it?- I (see) . . . it last month.


<b>WORD FORMS ( English 8)</b>
<b>II. Write the correct forms of the words in parentheses.</b>


1. She was . . . for days after the accidents.( conscious)


2. His speedy . . . after the operation was amazed all the doctor. (revide)
3. The. . . of water caused the dam to burst. (press)


4. A monument was erected to soilders who . . . for the revolution.(bleed)
5. Come by the fire. You must be . . . to the bone.(chill)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

7. She is very . . . .. . about her mother’s health.( anxiety)


8. The victim who has a dog bite needs an anti-tetanus . . . .( inject).
9. . . . her . . . . was more serious than we thought.( fortunate; ill)
10.Sapa is a wonderful . . . resort in Vietnam ( mountain)


11. I find circuses very. . . (excite)


12.It’s not easy to find cheap . . . at busy time.(accomandate)
13.Most tourists like visiting . . . . . villages. ( tribe)


14.There are . . . .ways of solving the problems.(variety)


15.Reduce means not buying products which are . . . .(overpackage)
16.Jennifer Jodie is one of the . . . . from Friends of the Earth.( present)


17.The country’s . . . resources include forests, coal, oil etc.(nature)
18.Waste paper can be . . . . . after being recycling.( use)


19.These wide animals are in . . . . (dangerous)


20.Compost is a wonderful . . . .. It helps plants grow. (fertilize)
21.Share your recycling story with our . . . (read).


22.Air is a . . . . .of gases. (mix)


23.He was the . . . .of the school after winning the contest. We are . . . . . of
him(proud)


24.Our country is rich in . . . . . resources. (nature)


25.Disneyland is one of the famous area of . . . . .(entertain)
26.He had no . . . . . for his absence. ( explain)


27.How . . . . . of you to break that cup.(care)
28.We live in a rather rich . . . . .(neighbor)


29.They are members of an international . . . .(organize)
30.Television is very . . . . . (popularity)


31.My grandmother can read . . . . without glasses./ She is the . . . . . student in
her class. ( good)


32.I prefer this chair. It is very . . . . . (comfort)
33.The weather is the . . . . in the year. (bad)



34.The tourists think that the food in that restaurant is . . . . (taste)
35.We are always busy with . . . . the Teacher’s day. ( celebrate)
36.It is . . . . . to take a taxi to the airport.( convenience)


37.The first public . . . was not successful. (perform)
38.Hoa and Lan used to be . . . . . (neighborhood)


39.Children need to have a good . . . . .(educate)


40.The first World . . . . . Festival was held in Prague in 1947.( young)
41.We will interview only three . . . . . for the job. ( apply)


42.Because of the . . . of her teacher, she decided to study law. (encourage)
43.Charities rely on . . . . . contributions. (volunteer)


44.What is the correct . . . of this word? (pronounce)


45.You’d better do some . . . . . . for the final examination.( revise)
46.Last year, we had an . . . . summer holiday.(enjoy)


47.She is actively. . . . . in social work.( participation)
48.The . . . of the project made me tense.( important)


<b>CHANGE SENTENCE ( English 8)</b>


<b>III. Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning</b>


23.They must pay the bill at once.


The bill...


24.Many people in the world speak English.


English...
25.The question is difficult to understand.


It’s...
26.I will repair your bike tomorrow afternoon.


Your bike...
27.“Don’t throw waste paper away”. Miss Hoa sais to her students


Miss Hoa asked...
28.Does Viet Nam export rice to America?


Is rice...
29.I was very delighted that I passed the final exam.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

“ Kieu Story”...
31.Christmas cards should be sent a week before Christmas day.


You...
32.Roses can’t possibly grow in such poor ground.


It’s impossible...
33.“We are waiting for the bus “ said children.


Children said...
34.Nobody has used this room for many years.


This room...


35.She said to me:”Turn offthe lights before I leave the room”.


She...
36.The last time I played tennis was ten years ago.


I haven’t...
37.Is it alright if I take some photographs?


Would you mind...
38.Is it two months since I saw her?


I haven’t...
39.I am going to repair my car next week.


I am going to have...
40.“ I hate myself for loving you” He said to her.


He...
41.What beautiful flowers!


How...
42.What was his weight last year?.


How...
43.This shirt is cheaper than that one.


That shirt...
44.“ Do you like natural beauty?said she.


She ...



<b>IV.PREPOSITION</b>


a. She is a pretty girl . . . long black hair.
b. She goes . . . school five days a week.


c. We often go swimming . . . our friends . . . Monday mornings.
d. Mr Brown lives . . . .2/34 Nguyen Trai street.


e. Daisy has a lot . . . friends.


f. . . her friends, Nga and Hang are the ones she spends most of her time . . . . .
g. They are all like listening . . . music and playing sports . . . their free time.


1. The post office is not far . . . my house.
2. Let’s meet . . . the City Theater tonight.


3. She was born . . . May 16th<sub>, 2001 . . . Da Nang.</sub>
4. He worked . . . deaf-mutes . . . Boston University.
5. You could reach me . . . 881175.


6. Snow is falling all . . . the country.
7. Will you pick me . . . after the party.
8. The secretary took a message . . . her boss.


a. There is a bus station . . . the end os this road.
b. Keep those medicine . . . the children’s reach.


c. I lost my keys somewhere . . . the car and the house.
d. Come . . . and sit . . . your sister.



e. D comes . . . C in the alphabet.
f. The boat sank . . . the waves.


g. Don’t shelter . . . the trees when it’s raining.


h. Please put these books . . . the bookshelf . . . the desk.
i. My mother never goes out for dinner . . . Saturday evening.


1. Mozart was born . . . Salzburg . . . 1756.
2. Saturday night I went to bed . . . 10 o’clock.
3. They got married . . . . .21 April 1990.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

5. The course begins . . . January and enda sometime . . .
March.


6. She doesn’t like travelling . . . night.
7. We always pray . . . meals


8. His English class finishes . . . 7.30. Let’s meet . . . 7.30.
9. Do you often give others presents . . . . Christmas Day.
10.What do you often do . . . . the weekend.


I am looking forward……… hearing from you.
They are interested ……… playing video games.
Hoa likes taking part ………. Sports.


Are you fond of ………. Reading books.


<b>Date : 20/4</b>



<b> Period </b> 98

<b>45 minute correction</b>



<b>A.Objectives</b>: By the end of the lesson, T helps students to find out their mistakes in
the test.


<b>I . Knowledge</b>: Vocabulary and structures in unit 12-14


<b>II. Skills</b> : Reading and writing


<b>III. Preparation</b>: test papers


<b>B.Contents:</b>


<b> Teacher's activities</b>


T asks Ss to do the test again, sentence by sentence and
then T corrects.and asks Ss to copy on notebooks


<b> Answer keys:</b>


I


1b 2 a 3b 4 b 5d 6 b 7 a 8c 9a
II


1 was cooking -was playing.
2 arrived -was sounding.
3 is built- .



4 learnt/ learned
III


1 I asked Lan if Hue people were friendly.
2 He asked me if he liked beef


3 English book are bought from this shop
4 This road was repaired by him


5 The tourist asked Mai if Cua tung beach was in VL
IV


1 Two populations are decorating and singing
Christmas carols


2 In the coner of the living room


3They swap srtings of colorful lights in the tree
4 They gather around the Christmas tree to sing and


<b>Students' activities</b>


Ss answer and


copydown their note
book.


<b>IV. Consoldation</b>:


<b> V. Homework:</b>



Prepare Unit 16 Lesson 1


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period:53


<b>REVISION</b>



<b> A.OBJECTIVES</b>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

<b>I.Knowledges: </b>


<b> II.Skills:</b> writing, speaking


<b> B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance


<b> II.Checking:</b> No check
<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


1.Choose the correct answer for each sentence
1. Mrs. Nga speaks English _____________.
a. good



b. goodly
c. well


2. We________ television yesterday evening.
a. watch


b. watched
c. to watch


3. They should go to the movies _____ 6:30 and
7:00.


a. on
b. at


c. between


4. Mai usually _______ school in the morning.
a. goes


b. go
c. went


5. Hoa used to ________ long hair.
a. has


b. have
c. had


6. Quang had bad marks in Math last semester.


He should _____ .


a. watch TV a lot
b. do a lot of homework
c. write a lot of letters


T.asks Ss to choose the correct answer for each
sentence.


2.Do as directed direction:


1. Ba loves (do) _______________ homework.


<i> (Give the correct form of the verb)</i>


2. Miss Jackson said to Tim’s mother: “ Tim
was an excellent student”


-Tim’s mother said to Tim ………..
3. Bell was born ____ March 3rd<sub> _____1847.</sub>


<i> (Fill in the blanks with the correct</i>
<i>preposition)</i>


4. May I help you?


<i> (Answer the question)</i>


Answer



1.doing


2.Tim’s mother said to Tim he was an excellent
student.


3.on-in


Ss work ind. and choose the correct
answer for each sentence.


m. to give
n. to buy
o. prepare
p. have lived
q. have come
r. has ..eaten
s. Have…seen


t. Saw
u. Hottest
v. Coldest
w. Shorter
x. More expensive


Ss work in ind. to rewrite these
sentences .


1.Hoa asked Lan to lend her
dictionary.



2. Minh asked her sister to help her
with her homework.


3 . The teacher asked me.to learn EL
every day


<b>IV.Consolidation</b>:(involved)


<b>V.Homework</b>:


-Revise all studied knowledge for the next revision period.


<b>--- </b>  <b> </b>


---Date:


Period: 54


<b>REVISION</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to remain knowledge in the first term and know
the mistakes from the terminal test.


<b>I.Knowledges: </b>


<b> II.Skills:</b> writing, speaking


<b> B.PROCEDURES</b>:


<b> I.Settlement:</b>Greeting and check the attendance



<b> II.Checking:</b> No check


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Presentation:</b>


<b>-</b>Recalls the fofm ,the use, the meaning by
asking some questions


How long have you learn English?
What is the weather like?


+ The form:
a.The present perfect
Form : S+ have/ has +P2.


Use : th.


b.The present progressive tense


Form : S+ is/am /are +V-ing Use : to
talk about the future and to show the changes


with get and become
c. Comparative and superlative


 Comparative:
+ Short adj + ER + than…..


+More + Long adj +than …..


* Superlative:


+The + Short adj + EST…..
+The most + Long adj …..
e. Should /Ought to/Must +V-inf.
f. Ask/said /told +SO +to do some thing.


<b>2. Practice:</b>


<b>*</b> Put the verbs in the correct tense
Asks Ss to put the verbs in the correct tense.


a. She asks me …(give) a book.
b. Linh told me ….(buy) Tom at here.
c. Miss Chau said “You should ….(prepare)


lesson at home”.


d. We…(live ) in VH since 40 years
e .You …(come) in VH for 4 years


b. She …just…(eat) cakes.
c. ….You….(see) him?
d. Yes,I ..(see) him yesterday.
e. The summer is the…(hot) in VN


f. Winter is the…(cold) in VN
g. This ruler is…(short) than that ruler


h. This bike is ….(expensive) than that


bike.


 Rewrite these sentences .
T. asks Ss to rewrite these sentences


.


.1.’’Please lend me your dictionary,lan” said
Hoa.


2 ‘’Can you help me with my homework?”
Minh said to her sister.


3’’You should learn EL every day” the
teacher said me.


Listen and answer the questions in
dividually


I have learnt English since 2000.
It is cold and colder.


Copy down the form and give examples
I have learnt English since 2003


She has lived in VH for 3 years


The girls are getting clever


The rivers are becoming dirty


She is clever than Hoa.
SHe is more beautiful than Hoa.


She is the tallest girl.


Hoa is the most beautiful girl in my
class.


Work ind. to put the verbs in the correct
tense.


y. to give
z. to buy
aa. prepare
bb.have lived
cc. have come
dd.has ..eaten
ee. Have…seen


ff. Saw
gg.Hottest
hh.Coldest
ii. Shorter
jj. More expensive


Ss work in ind. to rewrite these
sentences .



1.Hoa asked Lan to lend her
dictionary.


2. Minh asked her sister to help her
with her homework.


3 . The teacher asked me.to learn EL
every day


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

<b>V.Homework</b>:


-Revise all studied knowledge for the next revision period.


</div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×